Cad Wor x Spec Editor Users Guide

CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide

Version 2016 (16.0)

Octob er 2015 DICAS-PE-200013E

Copyright Copyright © 2012-2015 Intergraph ® Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon. Hexagon . Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. U.S. Government Government Restri cted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its its successors, and is unpublished and and all rights are reserved reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3. Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright l aws of the United States. Intergraph Corporation 305 Intergraph Way Madison, AL 35758

Documentation Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides, Administrator's Guides, Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered delivered with a particular software product.

Other Documentation Documentation Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support, SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use a.

Use of a software product and Documentation Documentation is subject to the End User User License Agreement ("EULA") ("EULA") delivered with the software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the Licensee has a valid si gned license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

b.

For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where where end user does not receive receive a EULA EULA or does does not have a valid license agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation Documentation for Licensee’s Licensee’s internal, non-commercial non-commercial use. The Other Documentation Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or im plied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document. The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and m ay be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this l icense. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT. Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limi ted to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.


2

Limitation of Damages IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. DAMAGES. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2) YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED. IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF T HIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls Intergraph Corporation’s software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under the following circumstances: a.

To Cuba, Iran, North North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these these countries.

b.

To any person person or entity listed on any any U.S. government government denial list, including but not limited limited to, the the U.S. Department Department of Commerce Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.ht /liststocheck.htm, m, the U.S. Department of T reasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enf http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, orcement/ofac/, and the U.S. Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html. .html.

c.

To any entity entity when Licensee Licensee knows, or has reason reason to know, know, the end use of the Software Product is related related to the design, development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive nuclear uses.

d.

To any entity entity when Licensee Licensee knows, or has reason reason to know, know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.

Any questions regarding regarding export or re-export of these these Software Products Products should be addressed to Intergraph Intergraph Corporation’s Corporation’s Export Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.

Trademarks Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, CADWorx, and CAESAR II are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States, and other c ountries. Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation, and/or its affiliates. AutoCAD, ObjectARX, and RealDWG are trademarks of Autodesk. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft 3D, L.L.C. Other brands, and product names are trademarks of their respective owners. CADWorx Design Review contains Autodesk® RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc., copyright © Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved. Autodesk, Inc., Inc., 111 McInnis Parkway, Parkway, San Rafael, Rafael, California 94903 ("Autodesk") is a third-party beneficiary beneficiary to this Agreement Agreement to the extent that the Software Product contains RealDWG, and to the extent that the provisions herein relate to Licensee’s use of the Software Product containing RealDWG. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Autodesk, and are enforceable by Autodesk in addition to Intergraph. Intergraph.


3

Contents Int ergr aph CADWo rx Cat alog and Spec if ic ati on Ed it or .............. ....................... .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. ................ ....... 7

What's New in Spec Editor.................................................................................................................... 10 Keywords .............................................................................................................................................. 11 Quick Access Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 14 Status Bar ............................................................................................................................................. 15 Help ....................................................................................................................................................... 15 File ............................................................................................................................................................... 16

Upgrade Previous Version Project and Catalog Files.................... Files............................. .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. ........... .. 17 New Catalog................................... ................ ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ............ 17 New Project ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ............ 18 New Pipe Support Libraries .................................................................................................................. 20 Open ..................................................................................................................................................... 21 Save ...................................................................................................................................................... 21 Save As.................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ................. 21 Save As Pipe Support Libraries ............................................................................................................ 22 Recent Files .......................................................................................................................................... 22 About ................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................ .......22 Exit Spec Editor..................................................................................................................................... 22 Home Catalog Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 23

Clipboard Clipboa rd Panel.................... Panel.. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ... 23 Paste............................................................................................................................................... 23 Copy ............................................................................................................................................... 24 Cut .................................................................................................................................................. 25 Other Editing Features .......................................................................................................................... 25 Undo ............................................................................................................................................... 25 Remove Row ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ... 25 Add Table Panel.............. Panel....................... ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ........... .. 25 Edit Table Features ........................................................................................................................ 26 Size Table ................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ........ 30 Bolt Diameter Table ........................................................................................................................ 32 Bolt Length Table ........................................................................................................................... 35 Material Table ................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .. 38 Schedule Schedul e Table ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. 40 Thickness Table ............................................................................................................................. 42 End Type Table .............................................................................................................................. 43 Category Categor y Table ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. 46 Data Table .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ...... 46 IndexCode Table ............................................................................................................................ 51 DBCode Table .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. 52 End Prep Table................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. 54 Legacy Catalog Data Panel .................................................................................................................. 56 Import By Spec ............................................................................................................................... 57


4

Contents Import From Data File ..................................................................................................................... 58 Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File .......................................................................... 61 Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File .................................................................................. 62 Transfer Data Panel .............................................................................................................................. 65 Catalog Data ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .. 65 Project Data ................. .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ..... 66 Support Data .................................................................................................................................. 68 Export Data Panel ................................................................................................................................. 69 Export Table To Text Excel ............................................................................................................ 69

View Catalo g Tab .................. ........................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ........... 70

Display Displa y Panel ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ......... 70 Catalog Data ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .. 70 Base Catalog Data ......................................................................................................................... 72 Properties ....................................................................................................................................... 72 Component Componen t Tables ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. ............ 75 EndType Tables ............................................................................................................................. 75 Component Types .......................................................................................................................... 75 Hom e Proj ect Tab ................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ........... 77

Specification Panel ............................................................................................................................... 77 Add Specification .................. .......................... ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ........77 New and Edit Component Pane ..................................................................................................... 80 Long, Short, Tag, T ag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes ....................... ................................ ................. ................. .................. ........... .. 86 Add single new component to a spec.................. ........................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ............ ... 89 Add Multi Component Pane Pane ................ ......................... ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ........... .. 91 Add multiple new components to to a spec .................. ........................... ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ........93 Edit Project Specs features ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. ...... 94 Import AutoPLANT Specification Data ........................................................................................... 95 Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data ................................................................................ 98 Import Specification From SPRD File ........................................................................................... 103 Pipe Support Panel ............................................................................................................................. 105 Add Pipe Support Library Library ........... .................... .................. ................. ................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .........105 Import Legacy Pipe Support Library ............................................................................................. 107 Catalog Panel..................... Panel.. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ... 108 Update From Catalog ................................................................................................................... 108 Review Table Links ...................................................................................................................... 109 Legacy Specification Panel ................................................................................................................. 111 Import Legacy Specification ......................................................................................................... 111 Export/Import Export/Imp ort Data Panel................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. ....... 112 Export to Excel ............................................................................................................................. 112 Export to Text ............................................................................................................................... 122 Import Update From Excel ........................................................................................................... 123 Editing Panel ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ................... ...... 124 Find and Replace ......................................................................................................................... 125 View Proj ect Tab ................. .......................... .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. .................. ................. ................. ........... 127

Display Displa y Panel ................. ................... .................. .................. ................... .................. .................. ....... 127 Project Specs ............................................................................................................................... 127


5

Contents Project Catalog Data .................................................................................................................... 127 Pipe Support Library ..................................................................................................................... 128 Properties ..................................................................................................................................... 138

Pipe Supp or t Li br ary Fil e Home Tab .....................................................................................................155 Pipe Supp or t Li br ary Fil e View Tab .......................................................................................................156

Display Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 156 Properties ..................................................................................................................................... 156 Prop ert y Descr ip ti on s .............................................................................................................................162

Project Properties................................................................................................................................ 162 Specification Properties ................................................................................................................ 163 Pipe Support Libraries Properties ....................................................................................................... 166 Pipe Support Library Properties ................................................................................................... 167 Catalog Properties .............................................................................................................................. 170 Size Tables Properties ................................................................................................................. 171 Material Tables Properties ........................................................................................................... 173 Schedule Tables Properties ......................................................................................................... 174 Thickness Tables Properties ........................................................................................................ 175 EndType Tables Properties .......................................................................................................... 176 Data Tables Properties ................................................................................................................. 179 IndexCode Tables Properties ....................................................................................................... 236 DBCode Tables Properties ........................................................................................................... 236 End Prep Tables Properties ......................................................................................................... 237 Updat e Hist or y ......................................................................................................................................... 239 Glossary ................................................................................................................................................... 244 Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 262


6

SECTION 1

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor The CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor views, edits, and creates specifications and catalog data loaded with CADWorx. The Specification Editor also imports legacy data, and specs from all versions of CADWorx. Your project administrator needs to review and update the catalog (.cat) and project (.prj) file in the Specification Editor before modeling begins. Catalog File

Contains all the size, bolt di ameters, bolt lengths, materials, schedules, thickness, end types, categories, component data, index codes, database codes, and end prep data for all the components in CADWorx. This is a .cat file, located in [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec, and can only be accessed through the Specification Editor. The catalog file works in conjunction with the project (.prj) file to allow CADWorx to build m odels. The areas highlighted in red are referenced throughout this manual. Windows such as the Catalog Data window are referenced by the window name. Please take a m oment to get familiar with the interface.

The View tab is explained in View Catalog Tab (on page 70).


7

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor Project File

Contains the specifications for CADWorx. This is a .prj file, l ocated in [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec, and can only be accessed through the Specification Editor. These specifications can be updated by changing the base catalog attached to the project. You can also update the individual components using the Edit Component dialog box. CADWorx uses the project file for specifications and si zes when creating a model. The areas highlighted in red are referenced throughout this manual. Windows such as the Project Specs window are referenced by the window name. Please take a moment to get familiar with the interface. The Component tab is the default tab when, you open the Main Spec List View.

The View tab is explained in View Project Tab (on page 127).


8

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor Pipe Support Libraries File

Contains a separate pipe support libraries file for CADWorx. This is a .psl file, located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder, and can only be accessed through the Specification Editor. CADWorx Spec Editor can use the pipe support libraries file in the Pipe Support Libraries Path to include that libraries file in CADWorx for building pipe support assemblies or to insert pipe supports. This allows you to have more than one set of libraries attached to your specification. You can also build assemblies to add to these pipe support libraries files in CADWorx. The areas highlighted in red are referenced throughout this manual. Windows such as the Pipe Support Library are referenced by the window name. Please take a moment to get familiar with the interface.

The View tab is explained in Pipe Support Library File View Tab (on page 156).


9

What's New in Spec Editor Version 2016 (16.0)

The following changes have been f or this release. For information on releases before 2016, se e Update History (on page 239).

Items added and updated with CADWorx Specifi cation Edit or 2016: Software Enhancements 















Improved the specification-level material assignment. You can set a material for each size of each component. You can define a material assignment setup at the all component level based on sizes, at the component group le vel based on sizes, and at the component type level based on sizes. The software still includes the previous material assignment options. For more information, see Material Assignment Setup (on page 144), Set material assignment for all components (on page 149), Set material assignment for all components based on size (on page 150), Set material assignment for a specific component (on page 151), Set material assignment for a specific component with a specific end type (on page 152), Export a material assignment setup (on page 153), Import a material assignment setup (on page 153), Display the material assigned to the component in CADWorx Plant (on page 153) and Material Table (on page 38). You can assign any Material Ass ignment Setup applicable to a component in the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. You can also add a new material assignment setup with the Add Materi al Set up option in the Material list of the New and Edit Component pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80). You can now change the default OTAP SKEY using the specification or project level Default OTAP SKEY property. For more information, see Project Properties (on page 162), and Specification Properties (on page 163). You can save the project files to a previous version. You can then open them in CADWorx Spec Editor or CADWorx Plant for versions 2016, 2015, or 2014. For m ore information, see Save As (on page 21). You can upgrade your projects and catalogs to the current version of the Specification Editor. This upgrade also adds the new features such as the Default OTAP SKEY to the upgraded specification. For more information, see Upgrade Previous Version Project and Catalog Files (on page 17). You can only use the Pipe Set Back (PSB) parameter to set the gap between the pipe and the socket weld flange. For more information, see Flanges (on page 190). Improved the Excel export. You can create your own export template or use one of the provided default templates to export your specifications. These export improvements enable you to import specifications from Excel back into the Specification Editor. For more information, see Export/Import Data Panel (on page 112), Export to Excel (on page 112), Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 113), Cell Name Reference Component Properties (on page 116), Export multiple specifications or an entire project to Excel (on page 122), and Export a single specification to Excel (on page 122). You can import specifications exported to Excel back into the Specification Editor. You must import an exported specification back into the sam e specification. For more information, see Import Update From Excel (on page 123), and Import data from Excel to a specification (on page 124).


10

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor 



Enhancement of pipe supports. You can create new pipe support libraries, save your pipe support data as a separate libraries file, create new assemblies, and edit the parts of those assemblies. You can edit the pipe support parts con nection points and set description formats for pipe supports. For more information, see Pipe Support Library File Home Tab (on page 155), Pipe Support Library File View Tab (on page 156), Pipe Support Panel (on page 105), and Pipe Support Library (on page 128). You can transfer data from a pipe support libraries file to the pipe support data in a project or to another pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Support Data (on page 68).

User Guide Revisions 





Updated information on the SUBDIRECTORY for PipeSupport, Topworks, and User Shapes topics. For more information, see PipeSupport (on page 206), Topworks (on page 224), and User Shapes (on page 228). Due to the enhancements of the Excel export, the text export became a separate topic and the development team created a new icon. For m ore information, see Export to Text (on page 122). Added a Glossary of common terms.

Keywords Keywords can be used in specification descriptions that a llow information to be automatically inserted during placement of a component. Keywords can be used anywhere within the Tag, Short Description, and Long Description fields. Keywords can also be used in the Index Code data file. Keywords are:

MAIN

RED

SPEC

MAINTHK

REDTHK

LENGTH

BORE

MAINACT

REDACT

TAG

MAINDEC

REDDEC

MAINACTDEC

REDACTDEC

PIPETHK
































11

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor

PIPETHKRED

LINENUM

SPECINFONOMINALRATING

SPECINFOTEMPERATURE

SPECINFOPRESSURE

SPECINFOPIPINGMATERIAL

SPECINFOGASKETMATERIAL

SPECINFOSTUDMATERIAL

SPECINFOBOLTMATERIAL

CWDBCODE





















The keywords {BORE}, {PIPETHK} and {PIPETHKRED} are calculated from the pipe data file in the specification instead of the component's data file. F or example, for a 4"x1" reducer, {PIPETHK} would get the values from the 4" pipe data file as listed in the specification. {PIPETHKRED} would get values from the 1" pipe data file. A 4"x1" reducer with {MAINTHK} or {REDTHK} would get the keyword values from the reducer data file as listed in the specification. Olet data files do not have any thickness values listed. Olet {MAINTHK} or {REDTHK} values are always read from the appropriate pipe data file. The {BORE} keyword is a calculation of the insid e diameter of the main pipe s ize. It is calculated using the following formula: {BORE} = [ (Pipe Outside Diameter of Main Size) - (2*Pipe Wall Thickness of Main Size) ]. Some ways in which keywords can be used are below: 

PIPE, {MAIN} {MAINTHK}" API-5L GR.B DSAW, PSL2



FLANGE, {MAIN} ANSI 150 RFWN {BORE}" BORE ASTM A105, ASME B16.5



NIPPLE, PIPE {MAIN} x {LENGTH} XS ASTM A106 GR.B



WELDOLET, {MAIN} {MAINTHK}" x {RED} {REDTHK}" ASTM A105, ASME B31.8







VALVE, PLUG {MAIN} ANSI 150 WE API 6D TWT {PIPETHK}" API-5L GR.B PIPE REG PAT LO GASKET, INSULATING KIT {MAIN} ANSI 600, RF, B={BORE}, PIKOTEK VCS WITH ZINC PLATED WASHERS, GRE INSULATING WASHERS AND SLEEVES BOLT, STUD {MAIN} x {LENGTH} ALLOY STEEL ASTM A193 CL 2A GR B7 W/2 HEX NUTS ASTM A194 CL 2B GR 2H (FOR {MAINDEC}" 150# FLG.)

User Defined Keyword s:

User defined keywords are now associated with user defined columns inside Spec Editor and can be created in catalog tables and projects by Custom Data in Properties.

Keyword Formatting: The numeric values are formatted based on the SystemMeasure. The tables below explain the different formatting for each of the keywords. The Alph aSizeCo nt ro l is read from the current configuration file.


12

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor Keyword

SystemMeasure - English/Inch

MAIN, RED

AlphaSizeControl

MAINACT, REDACT

AlphaSizeControl

MAINDEC, REDDEC Always 3 decimal places MAINACTDEC, REDACTDEC

Always 3 decimal places

MAINTHK, REDTHK


BORE, PIPETHK, PIPETHKRED


LENGTH

Based on DIMLUNIT, DIMDEC, DIMLFAC

SPEC

Specification filename without extension

Keyword

SystemMeasure - Metric/Inch

MAIN, RED

AlphaSizeControl

MAINACT, REDACT

LUPREC and DIMZIN control number of decimals



MAINTHK, REDTHK




LENGTH


SPEC



13

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor Keyword

SystemMeasure Metric/Metric

MAIN, RED

AlphaSizeControl

MAINACT, REDACT

AlphaSizeControl



MAINTHK, REDTHK




LENGTH


SPEC


Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar is located in the upper left-hand corner next to File

.

Main tools available Open

Opens the Open File dialog box and allows you to select a file to open. Save

Saves the project or catalog that you are currently work ing in. Undo

Undoes the work you previously did in case you made a mistake. Redo

Redoes the work you just did in case you changed your m ind and wanted the information back. Ab ou t

Displays the Abou t box, which displays information about your copy of the software, including version number and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices. Customize Quick Access Toolbar

Enables you to add other features to the Quick Access Toolbar.


14

Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor Customize Quick Access Toolbar features New Catalog

Starts a new catalog. New Project

Starts a new project. More Commands

Allows you to add commands in the Spec Editor to the Quick Access toolbar with the Customize dialog box. Show Below the Ribbon

Moves the Quick Access toolbar below the ribbon. Minimize the Ribbon

Minimizes the ribbon.

Status Bar Located at the bottom of the Spec Editor, displaying the word Ready as well as whether the caps lock (CAP ), number lock (NUM), or scroll lock (SCRL ) is on. When an item is selected, the bar's Ready status changes to the amount of items selected, such as 13 items selected . When an item is selected in the Main Table List View, the item with its value is displayed in the status bar next to CAP. There is no command for this bar.

Help Click the question mark in the upper ri ght corner of the Spec Editor to open the help file. Help - Displays the help file.


15

SECTION 2

File The File menu commands are used to create, save, and open catalogs and projects in the specification editor. New Catalog - Creates a new catalog. For m ore information, see New Catalog (on page 17). New Project - Creates a new project. For m ore information, see New Project (on page 18). New Pipe Support Libr aries - Creates a new pipe support library enabling you to design specific pipe supports. For more information, see New Pipe Support Libraries (on page 20). Open - Opens previously created projects or catalogs. For more information, see Open (on page 21). Save - Saves current project or catalog. For m ore information, see Save (on page 21).

Save As - Saves current project or catalog with a new name. For more information, see Save As (on page 21). Save As Pipe Support Libr aries - Saves the pipe support data into a s eparate libraries file. You can rename the file, and select where the file saves. For m ore information, see Save As Pipe Support Libraries (on page 22). Recent Files - Opens recently opened fil es. For more information, see Recent Files (on page 22). Ab ou t - Displays information about the Spec Editor. For more information, see About (on page 22). Exit Spec Editor - Exits the Spec Editor. For more information, see Exit Spec Editor (on page 22).


16

File

Upgrade Previous Version Project and Catalog Files In CADWorx 2016, you can upgrade CADWorx 2014 and CADWorx 2015 project and catalog files. When you open a previous version catalog or project file, the software prompts you with the Open Catalog or Open Project upgrades message box. These boxes enable you to upgrade to the current version of the CADWorx Specification Editor. Upgrade

Upgrades the selected file and makes it incompatible with older versions of the Specification Editor and CADWorx Plant. This upgrade places the new features into the origin al file. For example, the Material Assignment Setup transfer to the new Material Assignment Setup, but you can now assign them by com ponent and size. Save backup & Upgrade

Saves a backup of the original file and upgrades the selected file to the current CADWorx Specification Editor version. You can continue to use the origi nal file by removing the .bak from the file extension.

New Catalog CADWorx Spec Editor File: New Catalog Creates a new catalog with a specific l ayout for sizes, thicknesses, materials, schedules, end types, and components for a customer. Name

Specifies the name of the new catalog. Type

Specifies the type of catalog. The following catalog options are available: 

Company Catalog

Builds a catalog for a specific company. 

Global Catalog

Builds a catalog for an entire industry. This catalog is the base catalog. Global catalogs are used when an entire industry, such as the oil industry, has all the same information. 

Industry Catalog

Builds a catalog for a specific industry. Base Catalog

Specifies the catalog that this new catalog pulls its information from. Description

Specifies the description of the catalog. Location

Specifies the folder where this catalog is saved.


17

File Units

Specifies the units of measure that are to be used in this catalog. The fol lowing unit options are available: 

English/Inch

Uses the imperial system with nominal inch input. 

Metric/Inch

Uses the metric system with nominal inch input. 

Metric/Metric 

1.

Uses the metric system with metric input.

Click File > New Catalog

.

The New Catalog dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the catalog in the Name box.

3.

Select a catalog type from the Type list: Company Catalog, Global Catalog, or Industry Catalog .

4.

For a company or industry catalog, click the Base Catalog ellipsis, select the necessary base catalog, and then click OK . For global catalogs, skip to step 5. Global Catalogs are the base catalog.

5.

Type a description of the catalog in the Description box.

6.

Define the location to save the new catalog. Click the Location ellipsis, select the necessary base catalog, and then click OK .

7.

Select a unit type from the Units list: English/Inch , Metric/Inch, or Metric/Metric. The base catalog you select m ust use the same units you specify in the Units list.

8.

Click OK to create the new catalog. The catalog list is created and displays under Catalog Data on the left side of the spec editor, in the Main List View.

New Project CADWorx Spec Editor File: New Project Creates a new project enabling you to d esign specifications for companies or customers. Name

Specifies the name of the project. Default Catalog

Specifies a default catalog to attach to the project. DBCode Table

Specifies the database code table for the project. This database code comes from the DBCode Tables in the Default Catalog.


18

File BOM type

Specifies the Bill of Material (BOM) type for the project. There are four material types: Fabrication , Erection , Offshore, and Miscellaneous . Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long description attached to the components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the components. Tag Format Setup Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the components. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the com ponents. For more on the Format Setups , see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139). Layer Manager

Specifies the layers for the project. For more information, see Layer Manager Dialog Box (on page 142). Description

Specifies the description of the project. Location Specifies the folder location where the project saves.

1.

Click File > New Project

.

The New Project dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the project in the Name box.

3.

Click the Default Catalog ellipsis, select the necessary catalog, and then click Open .

4. Select the database code table, when applicable, from the DBCode Table list. 5. Select the Bill of Material type from the BOM type list. 6. Click Long Desc Form at, edit the long description format, and then click OK . 7. Click Part Number Format, edit the part number format, and then click OK . 8. Click Short Desc Format, edit the short description format, and then click OK . 9. Click Tag Format, edit the tag format, and then click OK . 10. Click Layer Manager , add the layers you need, and then click OK . For more information, see Layer Manager Dialog Box (on page 142). 11. Type a description of the project in the Description box. 12. Click the Location ellipsis to browse, select a location to save the new project, and then click OK . 13. Click OK to create the project. The project creates and displays under Project Specs on the left side of the Spec Editor in the Main List View.


19

File

New Pipe Support Libraries CADWorx Spec Editor File: New Pipe Support Li braries Creates a new pipe support libraries file enabling you to design specific pipe supports. Name

Specifies the name of the pipe support l ibraries file. Default Catalog

Specifies a default catalog to attach to the pi pe support libraries file. BOM type

Specifies the Bill of Material (BOM) type for the pipe su pport libraries file. There are four material types: Fabrication , Erection , Offshore, and Miscellaneous . Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long description attached to the pipe support assemblies and components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the pip e support assemblies and components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the pipe support assemblies and components. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the p ipe support assemblies and components. Description

Specifies the description of the pipe support libraries file. Location

Specifies the folder location where CADWorx Spec Editor saves the pipe support libraries file. 1.

Click File > New Pipe Support L ibraries

.

The New Pipe Support Li braries dialog box displays.

2. Type the name of the pipe support libraries file in the Name box. 3. Click the Default Catalog ellipsis, select the necessary catalog, and then click Open . 4. Select the Bill of Material type from the BOM type list. 5. Click Long Desc Format, edit the long description format, and then click OK . 6. Click Part Number Format, edit the part number format, and then click OK . 7. Click Short Desc Format, edit the short description format, and then click OK . 8. Click Tag Format, edit the tag format, and then click OK .


20

File 9.

Type a description of the pipe support libraries file in the Description box.

10. Click the Location ellipsis to browse, select a location to save the new project, and then click OK . 11. Click OK to create the project. The pipe support libraries file creates and displays under Pipe Support Library on the left side of the Spec Editor in the Main List View.

Open CADWorx Spec Editor File: Open Opens an existing project or catalog. 1.

Click File > Open

.

2.

Select the project or catalog to open, and then click Open . If prompted to update the project from the base catalog, select Yes or No . Selecting Yes updates the project from the base catalog. Selecting No does not update the project from the base catalog. This prompt only happens when you have made a change to the base catalog. The project or catalog opens for editing.

Save CADWorx Spec Editor File: Save Saves the catalog or project changes. This command is only available if you make changes to a product or catalog.



Click File > Save

.

The project or catalog is saved with the defined file name and location.

Save As CADWorx Spec Editor File: Save As Saves the catalog or project, but gives you the option to rename the file, and select where the file saves. You can save a previous version of the file for use in a previous version of the CADWorx Specification Editor and CADWorx Plant. If you save in a previous version, the Required Changes To Contin ue message displays describing modifications required with the previous version. Show Details

Displays the data changes required by the s oftware to save the project as a different version. For example, Save As needs to remove the Default OTAP SKEY from the Specification and Project properties for the project to s ave.


21

File

Save As Pipe Support Libraries CADWorx Spec Editor File: Save As Pipe Support Li braries Saves the pipe support data into a separate libraries file. You can rename the file, and select where the file saves.

Recent Files CADWorx Spec Editor File: Recent Files Provides a list of previously opened files. This command enables you to reopen files you have previously worked with.



Click File, and then select a Recent Files from the list. The selected file opens.

Ab out CADWorx Spec Editor File: Ab ou t Displays the version and copyright date for the CADWorx Spec Editor.

Exit Spec Editor CADWorx Spec Editor File: Exit Spec Editor Exits the software.



Click File, and then click Exit Spec Edito r . If prompted to Save File, select Yes, No, or Cancel . The Spec Editor closes.


22

SECTION 3

Home Catalog Tab Gives you access to the features in an open catalog. Clipboard - Enables you to edit the fields within the Spec Editor. For more information, see Clipboard Panel (on page 23). Ad d Tab le - Enables you to add tables to a catalog. For more information, see Add Table Panel (on page 25). Legacy Catalog Data - Enables you to import legacy data. For more information, see Legacy Catalog Data Panel (on page 56). Transfer Data - Enables you to transfer project, catalog, and pipe support data. For m ore information, see Transfer Data Panel (on page 65). Export Data Panel - Enables you to export data to either a text document or an Excel document. For more information, see Export Data Panel (on page 69). Exit Spec Editor - Closes the Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor.

Clipboard Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Clipboard Paste - Pastes text from the clipboard into the project or catalog. For more information, see Paste (on page 23). Copy - Copies highlighted text from the project or catalog text areas to the cli pboard. For more information, see Copy (on page 24). Cut - Cuts highlighted text from the project or catalog text areas and places it o n the clipboard. For more information, see Cut (on page 25).

Paste CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Clipboard > Paste Keyboard: CTRL+V Pastes text into the project or catalog after using Cut (on page 25) or Copy (on page 24). 

Right-click the row where you want the text, and then select Paste. Alternatively, click the Home tab, and then click Paste


on the Clipboard panel.

23

Home Catalog Tab

Copy CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Clipboard > Copy Keyboard: CTRL+C Copies highlighted text from the project or catalog. Use Paste (on page 23) to place copied text when required. 

Highlight the text to be copied, right-click it, and then select Copy . Alternatively, click the Home tab, and then click Copy on the Clipboard panel.

Right click Copy in Catalog Data Copies a selected table to Catalog Data. 

Select a table to copy, right click it, and then select Copy. The table pastes below the previous table.

This only works on the tables themselves and not on the table folders.

Right click Copy in Project Specs Copies a selected specification to Project Specs . 

Select a specification to copy, right click it, and then select Copy. The specification pastes at the end of the list of specifications.

Right click Copy in the component list Copies selected components from the components list in the Main Spec List View. For more information on Main Spec List View, see Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor (on page 7). 

Select a group of components to copy, right click, and then select Copy. The software pastes the components at the end of the list for that component.

Copy information from Br anch Table to another branch table Copies a selected range of rows and c olumns from one branch table and enables you to paste it to another branch table. 1.

Select the range of rows and columns you want to copy, and then click Copy Clipboard panel.

on the

2.

Open the specification within the same project or a different project, and then select the Branch tab.

3.

Select the rows and columns where you want to paste the information, and then click Paste on the Clipboard panel. Alternatively, you can use CTRL-V on the keyboard to paste the information in the branch table. The branch table information pastes in the rows and columns selected.


24

Home Catalog Tab

Cut CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Clipboard > Cut Keyboard: CTRL+X Cuts highlighted text from the project or catalog. Use Paste (on page 23) to place cut text. 

Highlight the text to be cut, right-click it, and then select Cut . Alternatively, click the Home tab, and then click Cut on the Clipboard panel.

Other Editing Features These features can be used throughout the Spec Editor, but are not located on the Clipboard panel.

Undo Undoes a change in the proj ect or catalog. 

Right-click the row in properties, and then select Undo . Undo is only available by rightclicking when in the Properties window, otherwise you must use the keyboard control. Spec Editor supports Undo using CTRL+Z. Undo is not available on the Clipboard

panel.

Remove Row Removes rows from the table. 

Right-click the row to be removed, and then select Remove Row .

Remove Row is only available by right-clicking on a row and is unavailable on the Clipboard panel.

Ad d Table Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le Enables you to create the information for a catalog. All options are disabled until you start a new catalog or open an existing catalog. The first row of each table m ust be filled out for the program to function properly. Size Table - Adds a new size table file to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Size Table (on page 30). Bolt Diameter Table - Adds a bolt diameter table to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 32). Bolt Length Table - Adds a bolt length table to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Bolt Length Table (on page 35).


25

Home Catalog Tab Material Table - Adds a new material table f ile to the Material Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Material Table (on page 38). Schedule Table - Adds a new schedule table file to the Schedule Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Schedule Table (on page 40). Thickness Table - Adds a new thickness table file to the Thickness Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Thickness Table (on page 42). End Type Table - Adds a new endtype table file to the End Type Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see End Type Table (on page 43). Category Table - Adds a new category to the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Category Table (on page 46). Data Table - Adds a data table file to a Data Tables selected category in Catalog Data. For more information, see Data Table (on page 46). IndexCode Table - Adds an index code table to the IndexCode Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see IndexCode Table (on page 51). DBCode Table - Adds a database codes table to the DBCodes Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see DBCode Table (on page 52). End Prep Table - Adds an end prep table to the Miscellaneous folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see End Prep Table (on page 54).

Edit Table Features Right-click Menu Ad d B ol t Diam eter Tabl e

Adds a bolt diameter table to the Size Tables folder. This option enables you to assign part numbers to each bolt diameter. For more information, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 32). Ad d B ol t L eng th Tabl e

Adds a bolt length table to the Size Tables folder. This option enables you to assign part numbers to each bolt length. For more information, see Bolt Length Table (on page 35). Ad d Cu st om Data To Al l Tabl es

Adds a custom data field to all tables in the selected tables folder. With this option, this can be done more than once in the New Field dialog box with the OK & New option. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 72). Import CADWorx Legacy Catalog From Spec File

Imports legacy data from a specification. For more information, see Import By Spec (on page 57). Import CADWorx Legacy Catalog From Data File

Imports legacy data from a data file. For more information, see Import From Data File (on page 58).


26

Home Catalog Tab Import Pipe Support Legacy From Ass embly File

Imports legacy data for pipe supports from an assembly file. For more information, see Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File (on page 61). Import Pipe Support L egacy From Data File

Imports legacy data for pipe supports from a data file. For more information, see Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File (on page 62). Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data

Imports data from AutoPLANT for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data (on page 28). Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data\

Imports data from AutoCAD Plant 3D for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data (on page 29). Remove All Tables

Removes all of the tables from the selected table type folder. Open

Displays the selected component in the Main T able List View. Copy

See Copy (on page 24). Remove

Removes the selected component from the table list. Rename

Renames the selected component. Select the component to be renamed, and then enter a new name. Expand

Expands the selected list. Collapse

Collapses the selected list. Expand All

Expands all the table lists. Collapse All

Collapses all the table lists. Properties

Displays the Properties view. Export Table To Text Excel

Exports data to a text document or Excel document. For more information, see Export Table To Text Excel (on page 69).


27

Home Catalog Tab Ad d t o b ase c atal og

Adds the selected table file to the base catalog. Commit t o Base Catalog

Commits the changes to the table in the base catalog. Update from Base Catalog

Updates the selected table with changes made to the base catalog. Review Table Lin ks

Enables you to check and change the details of the catalog from the base c atalog. For more information, see Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 109).

Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data Right-click on the catalog in the Main List View and select Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data. Imports data from an AutoPLANT catalog. Import

Imports the AutoPLANT data.

AutoPLANT Data File Path

Specifies the location of the AutoPLANT data. Tables

Specifies the AutoPLANT Data tables.

CADWorx Components Program Code

Displays the program code associated with the AutoPLANT data. Short Description

Displays a short description associated with the AutoPLANT data. Size

Displays the size associated with the component for the AutoPLANT data. Double-clicking the Size box displays a drop down that allows you to select or clear sizes. Schedule

Displays the schedule for the program code for the AutoPLANT component. Double-clicking the Schedule box displays a drop down that allows you to select or clear schedule data. Rating

Displays the rating of the program code for the AutoPLANT component. Double-clicking the Rating box displays a drop down that allows you to select or clear rating data. Select / deselect all

Selects and clears all check boxes in the CADWorx Comp onents box.


28

Home Catalog Tab 1.

Right-click on the catalog in the Main List View and select Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data. The Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data dialog box displays.

2.

Click the File Path ellipsis under Auto PLA NT Data . The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select the AutoPLANT data for import, and then click Open . 4. Select a table from the Tables list. 5. Select a Program Code by clicking the check box.





You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the program codes under CADWorx Compon ents . You can also change the Size, Schedule, or Rating by double-clicking the boxes under each heading.

6. Click Import. 7. Click OK. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View Log File. Imports the AutoPLANT data.

Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data Right-click the catalog in the Main List View, and select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data Imports data from an AutoCAD Plant 3D c atalog. Import

Imports the AutoCAD Plant 3D data.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Data Plant 3D List Files

Displays the Open dialog box and enables you to select one or more AutoCAD Plant 3D catalogs. Source Unit

Specifies the source unit being used for the import. If there are no components related to the Source Unit in the catalog you select, then the CADWorx Compon ents box remains empty. Usershape Block Unit

Specifies the units for the user shape block from the Plant 3D data. Catalog Li st

Specifies the catalog you selected from the Open dialog box.


29

Home Catalog Tab CADWorx Components Component Type

Displays a list of the components in t he AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Long Description

Displays a long description associated with the AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Select / deselect all

Selects and clears all check boxes in the CADWorx Comp onents box. Folder location box

Specifies the folder location of the AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog.

Right-click Menu Check group

Enables you to check a com ponent group under Component Type without expanding the group. Uncheck group

Enables you to clear a component group under Component Type without expanding the group. Expand All

Enables you to expand all the groups without having to select the plus sign. Collapse All

Enables you to collapse all the groups without having to select the plus sign. 1. Right-click the catalog in the Main List View, and then select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data. The Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data dialog box displays.

2. Click the Plant 3D List Files ellipsis under Auto CAD Plan t 3D Data . The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select the AutoCAD Plant 3D data for import, and then click Open . 4. Click the plus sign to expand the Component Type, and then click the check box for the component you want to add. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the groups under CADWorx Compon ents . 5.

Click Import.

6.

Click OK. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View Log File. CADWorx imports the AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog.

Size Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Size Table Adds a new size table file to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. The size table records the nominal size and outside diam eter (OD) data for all the components used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different size tables for use in CADWorx. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no restrictions to what you can name the table.


30

Home Catalog Tab Description

Specifies the description of the table. There are no restrictions to how you can describe the table. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. This can be changed. Current Units

Specifies the unit of measure for the size t able. This cannot be changed.

Size Table Fields NOM

Specifies the nominal size of the com ponent. OD

Specifies the outside diameter and the actual size of the component. Description

Specifies the size description of the component. PTN

Specifies the part number of the size. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26).

What do you w ant to do? 

Add a new size table (on page 31)



Add Standard Size (on page 32)



Add New Size (on page 32)



Edit size table (on page 32)

Add a new si ze table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Size Table

on the Add Tabl e panel. Alternatively,

right-click Size Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Size Tab le

.

The New Size Table dialog box displays.

2. Type the name of the table in the Name box. 3. Type the description of the table in the Description box. 4. Change or accept the Default Part Number . The Current Units box should already contain the units currently associated with the open catalog. You should not be able to change the contents of this box. 5. Click OK . The table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed at the top left. The table is also added to Catalog Data under the Size Tables folder.

6. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.


31

Home Catalog Tab Add Standard Size 1.

Right-click in the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d St and ard Size . For mainsize instead of standard size, see Add MAINSIZE (on page 45). The Select size from t emplate dialog box displays.

You cannot add standard sizes if all standards are already included in the selected table. 2.

Select the sizes that you need to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all values. The values selected are displayed in the Main Table List View.

3.

Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.

Add New Si ze 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d New Size . The software displays an empty box with the properties to enter.

For more information on the details of these properties, see Size Table (on page 30). 2. Type the necessary information in each box, pressing the TAB key to navigate to the next box. 3. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.

Edit si ze table 1.

Double-click a table file under Size Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.

Select a row or box to edit.

3.

Enter the changes, or right-click the table, and use Remove Row , Cut , Copy, or Paste to edit the information. The change displays.

4.


See Also Remove Row (on page 25) Cut (on page 25) Copy (on page 24) Paste (on page 23)

Bolt Diameter Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Bolt Diameter Table Adds a bolt diameter table to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. The bolt diameter table records the diameter of all the bolts use d with CADWorx and enables you to assign part numbers to each individual diameter. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no restrictions on t he name.


32


Specifies the description of the table. There are no restrictions on the description. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. You can ed it this box. Current Units

Specifies the unit of measure for the size t able. You cannot edit this box. The software automatically specifies the units based on the units you specified when creating the catalog.

Bolt Diameter Table Fields Diameter

Specifies the diameter of the bolt. Description

Specifies the description of the bolt diameter. PTN

Specifies the part number of the diameter. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26).


Add a new bolt diameter table (on page 33)



Add Standard Diameter (on page 34)



Add New Diameter (on page 34)



Edit bolt diameter table (on page 34)



Display the bolt diameter part number in CADWorx Plant (on page 35)

Add a new bolt d iam eter table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Bolt Diameter Table on the Ad d Tab le panel. Alternatively, right-click Size Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Bo lt Diam eter Table

.

The New B olt Diameter Table dialog box displays.




33

Home Catalog Tab Add Standard Diameter 1.

Right-click in the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d St and ard Diam eter . The Select size from t emplate dialog box displays.

You cannot add standard diameters if all standards a re already included in the selected table. 2.

Select the diameters that you need to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all values. The values selected are displayed in the Main Table List View.

3.


Add New Di ameter 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d New Diam eter . The software displays an empty row with the properties to enter.

For more information on the details of these properties, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 32). 2.

Type the necessary information in each box, pressing the TAB key to navigate to the next box.


Edit bol t d iameter table 1.

Double-click a bolt diameter file in Size Tables under in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.




34

Home Catalog Tab

Displ ay the bolt di ameter part num ber in CADWorx Plant 1.

Create a bolt diameter table in the catalog. Make sure you have added values in the PTN column, or the software displays no values in the Code box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 32).

2.

Click File > Save.

3. Open a project corresponding to the catalog. 4. Click Yes to update the project from the base catalog. 5. Double-click the specification. 6. In the Properties pane, select the bolt d iameter table name from the Bolt Diameter Table Name list. 7. In the Main Spec List View, under Gaskets/Bolts/Welds, select the bolt component. 8. In the Edit component pane, select a Description ellipsis. You can add the BOLT_DIAMETER_PTN schema to any of the description fields. However, this schema is only available on the bolt component. A description format dialog box displays.

9. Click the Component Tables list, and then select Size Tables . 10. Select the BOLT_DIAMETER_PTN schema in the Table Fields box. 11. Click Move right

to move the schema to the [Description] Format box.

12. Click OK . 13. Click File > Save. 14. Open a drawing in plant. 15. Set the specification with the bolt diameter part number schema. 16. Draw a flange set or a flange and valve set with bolts. 17. Double-click the bolts. The Component Edit dialog box displays with the bolt diameter part number in the Code box.

18. Check the value in the Code box to ensure it matches the value in the PTN column of the bolt diameter table.

Bolt Length Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Add Tabl e > Bolt Length Table Adds a bolt length table to the Size Tables folder in Catalog Data. The bolt length table records the length of each bolt used with CADWorx and enables you to assign part numbers to each individual length. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no r estrictions on the name.


35


Specifies the description of the table. There are no restrictions on the description. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. You can ed it this box. Current Units

Specifies the unit of measure for the size t able. You cannot edit this box. The software automatically specifies the units based on the units you specified when creating the catalog.

Bolt Length Table Fields Length

Specifies the length of the bolt. Description

Specifies the description of the bolt length. PTN

Specifies the part number of the length. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26).


Add a new bolt length table (on page 36)



Add Standard Length (on page 37)



Add New Length (on page 37)



Edit bolt length table (on page 37)



Display the bolt length part number in CADWorx Plant (on page 37)

Add a new bolt l ength t abl e 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Bolt Length Table on the Ad d Tabl e panel. Alternatively, right-click Size Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Bo lt Len gt h Table

.

The New Bol t Length Table dialog box displays.




36

Home Catalog Tab Add Standard Length 1.

Right-click in the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d St and ard Len gt h . The Select size from t emplate dialog box displays.

You cannot add standard lengths if all standards are already included in the s elected table. 2.

Select the lengths that you need to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all values. The values selected are displayed in the Main Table List View.

3.


Add New L ength 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d New Len gt h . The software displays an empty row with the properties to enter.

For more information on the details of these properties, see Bolt Length Table (on page 35). 2.

Type the necessary information in each box, pressing the TAB key to navigate to the next box.

3.


Edit bolt length table 1.

Double-click a bolt length table file under Size Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.



Display the bolt length part num ber in CADWorx Plant 1.

Create a bolt length table in the catalog. Make sure you have added values in the PTN column, or the software displays no values in the Code box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Bolt Length Table (on page 35).

2.

Click File > Save.

3.

Open a project corresponding to the catalog.


37

Home Catalog Tab 4.

Click Yes to update the project from the base catalog.

5.

Double-click the specification.

6.

In the Properties pane, select the bolt length table name from the Bolt Length Table Name list.

7.

In the Main Spec List View, under Gaskets/Bolts/Welds, select the bolt component.

8.

In the Edit component pane, select a Description ellipsis. You can add the BOLT_LENGTH_PTN schema to any of the d escription fields. However, this schema is only available on t he bolt component. A description format dialog box displays.

9.

Click the Component Tables list, and then select Size Tables .

10. Select the BOLT_LENGTH_PTN schema in the Table Fields box. 11. Click Move right

to move the schema to the [Description] Format box.

12. Click OK . 13. Click File > Save. 14. Open a drawing in plant. 15. Set the specification with the bolt length part number schema. 16. Draw a flange set or a flange and valve set with bolts. 17. Double-click the bolts. The Component Edit dialog box displays with the bolt length part number in the Code box.

18. Check the value in the Code box to ensure it matches the value in the PTN column of the bolt length table.

Material Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Material Table

.

Adds a new material table file to the Material Tables folder in Catalog Data. The material table records the specs data for all the components used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different material tables for use in CADWorx. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no restrictions to what you can name the table. Description

Specifies the description of the table. There are no description restrictions.

Material Table Fields Spec

Specifies the material, for example the material Spec can be based on the American Society for Testing and Material. This lists material such as ASTM A53, a carbon steel alloy.


38

Home Catalog Tab Grade

Specifies the material grade, for example the Grade can be based on the American Society for Testing and Material. Composition

Specifies the material composition. Comptypes

Specifies the applicable component types. When you set component types in the material table, that material becomes available for selection on the component in the Material Assignment Setup (on page 144). Density

Specifies the material density. PTN

Specifies the part number of the material. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26).


Add a new material table (on page 39)



Insert Row (on page 39)



Edit material table (on page 40)

Add a new material table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Material Table on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click Material Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Mater ial Table

.

The New Materi al Table dialog box displays.

2. Type the name of the table in the Name box. 3. Type the description of the table in the Description box. 4. Click OK . The new material table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed at the top left, and is also added to Catalog Data under the Material Tables folder.


Insert Row 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Insert Row . An empty row displays with the fie lds to enter.

2. Type the information in each box. Press TAB to navigate to the next box. 3. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.


39

Home Catalog Tab

Edit material table 1.

Double-click a material table file under Material Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.



Schedule Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Schedule Table Adds a new schedule table file to the Schedule Tables folder in Catalog Data. The schedule table records the schedule data for all components used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different schedule tables for use in CADWorx. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no restrictions to what you can name the table. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. This can be changed. Description


Schedule Table Fields SCH

Specifies the schedule for the component. SCHENCWT

The schedule used with enhanced weight calculation. PTN

Specifies the part number for the component. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26).


Add a new schedule table (on page 41)



Add Schedule (on page 41)



Edit schedule table (on page 41)


40

Home Catalog Tab

Add a new s ch edule table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Schedule Table on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click Schedule Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Sch edu le Table

.

The New Schedule Table dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the table in the Name box.

3.

Change or accept the Default Part Number .

4.

Type the description of the table in the Description box.

5.

Click OK . The new schedule table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed in at the top left. The new schedule is also added to Catalog Data under the Schedule Tables folder.

6.


Add Schedul e Adds a schedule to the Schedule Table file in the Main Table List View. Standard Items

Specifies the types of schedules you can add. Selected Items

Specifies the types of schedules you have added. 1. Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d Sc hed ul e. The Add Schedule Items dialog box displays.

2. Select a schedule item from the Standard Items list, and then click the Add ar ro w add the item to the Selected Items list.

to

You can select multiple items by hold ing the SHIFT or CTRL key down, and then selecting multiple items. Also, you can add new items by clicking New or delete an added item by clicking Delete . To move an item up and down in the list, simply select it, and use the Up and Down arrows to the side. 3. When all the items are added, click OK . The schedule items are added to the list.


Edit schedule table 1.

Double-click a schedule table file under Schedule Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.



41

Home Catalog Tab 3.


4.



Thickn ess Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Thickn ess Table Adds a new thickness table file to the Thickness Tables folder in Catalog Data. The thickness table records the thickness data for all the c omponents used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different thickness tables for use in CADWorx. Name

Specifies the table name. There are no restrictions to what you can name the table. Size Table

Specifies the size table attached to the thick ness table. Schedule Table

Specifies the schedule table attached to the thickness table. Description


Thickness Table Fields NOM

Specifies the nominal size of the component supplied by the size table. Other numbers The other numbers in the thickness table are pulled from the schedule table and represent the schedule of the thickness. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26).




Add a new thickness table (on page 43) Edit thickness table (on page 43)


42

Home Catalog Tab

Add a new t hi ck nes s t able 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Thickness Table on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click Thickness Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Thickness Table

.

The Thickness Table dialog box displays.

2.


3.

Select the size table from the Size Table list.

4.

Select the schedule table from the Schedule Table list.

5. Type the description of the table in the Description box. The new thickness table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed in at the top left. The thickness table is also added to Catalog Data under the Thickness Tables folder.

6. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog. The new table brings in all the nominal sizes from the size table, and the schedule numbers from the schedule table, emphasizing the thickness of each component according to its schedule.

Edit thick ness table 1.

Double-click a thickness table file under Thickness Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.


Thickness table rows can be removed by rem oving the associated nominal size i nside the associated size table.

See Also Cut (on page 25) Copy (on page 24) Paste (on page 23)

End Type Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > End Type Table Adds a new endtype table file to the EndType Tables folder in Catalog Data. The endtype table records end types data for all the c omponents used with CADWorx. You can use this command to create different endtype tables for use in CADWorx. Name Specifies the table name. There are no restrictions to what you can name the table. Type Specifies the end type applied to the table.


43

Home Catalog Tab Size Table

Specifies the size table attached to the en d type table. Part Number

Specifies the part number assigned to the table. Description


EndType Table Fields MAINSIZE

Specifies the main size of the component. OAL

Specifies the overall length. FACELEN

Specifies the face length. CFD

Specifies the connection face diameter. FFD

Specifies the face diameter. CHD

Specifies the connection hub diameter. FHD

Specifies the face hub diameter. PENGLEN

Specifies the pipe engagement length. CPENGD

Specifies the connection pipe engagement diameter. FPENGD

Specifies the face pipe engagement diameter. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26). For more information, see EndType Tables folder (on page 71).


Add a new endtype table (on page 45)



Add MAINSIZE (on page 45)



Add New MAINSIZE (on page 45)



Edit endtype table (on page 45)


44

Home Catalog Tab

Add a new endty pe tabl e 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click End Type Table on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click EndType Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d End Typ e Table

.

The New EndType Table dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the new table in the Name box.

3.

Select the end type from the Type list.

4.

Select the size table from the Size Table list. Clicking the Size Table ellipsis enables you to select the main size(s) for this endtype table. Alternatively, use Add M AINSIZE in the Main Table List View.

5. Type a part number in the Part Number box. 6. Type the description of the table in the Description box. 7. Click OK . The new endtype table displays in the Main Table List View with the name you typed in at the top left. The endtype table is also added to Catalog Data under the EndType Tables folder.


Add MAINSIZE 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d MAINSIZE . The Select size dialog box displays.

2.

Select the sizes to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or deselect all sizes. The sizes selected display in the Main Table List View.

3.


Add New MAINSIZE 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d New MAINSIZE. An empty box displays.

2.

Type the information in the applicable columns, using the TAB key to navigate to the next box.


Edit endtype table 1.

Double-click an end type table file under EndType Tables in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.



45

Home Catalog Tab 3.


4.


For more information, see EndType Tables (on page 75).


Category Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Category Table Adds a new category to the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. For more information, see Data Tables folder (on page 71). Category

Specifies the component category to be added. Description

Specifies the description of the category. There are no description restrictions. When adding a category, the d ata tables folder must be either empty or m issing a category. You cannot add multiple categories of the sam e component type. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Category Table

in the Add Tabl e panel.

Alternatively, right-click Data Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Cat ego ry

.

The Ad d Cat ego ry dialog box displays.

2. Click the Category list, and then select a category to add. 3. Type a description of the category in the Description box. 4. Click OK . The new category is added to the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data.


Data Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > Data Table Adds a data table to a Data Tables specific selected category in Catalog Data. This option is only available when categories have been previously created, and a particular category must be selected. For more information, see Data Tables folder (on page 71). Name Specifies the table name. There are no restrictions to what you can name the table. Type Specifies the component type applied to the table. F or more information, see Data Tables Properties (on page 179).


46

Home Catalog Tab Size Table

Specifies the size table attached to the data table. Default EndType

Specifies the end type for the table. 

Start

Specifies the end type for the start point of the component. 

End

Specifies the end type for the end p oint of the component. 

Left

Specifies the end type for the left branch of the component. 

Right

Specifies the end type for the right branch of the component. Part Number

Specifies the part number assigned to the table. Description

Specifies the description of the table. There are no description restrictions. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26). For descriptions of each column and category, see Data Tables Properties (on page 179).


Add a new data table (on page 47)



Add new user shape (on page 48)



Add new topworks table (on page 49)



Edit data table features (on page 50)

Add a new data table 1.

Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. The Data Tables folder expands, displaying the categories.

2.

Select a category.

3.

Click the Home tab, and then click Data Table on the Ad d Tab les panel. Alternatively, right-click a category in Data Tables in Catalog Data, and then select Add Data Table

.

The New Data Table dialog box displays.


47

Home Catalog Tab 4.

Type the name of the new data table in the Name box. The default can be entered for you if you skip to step 5.

5.

Click the Type list, and then select the type. The contents of the list depend on the category you chose at the beginning of these steps.

6.

Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table. Next, click the Size Table ellipsis, select the sizes to add from the Select Size list, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes.

7.

To apply the same end type on all ends, click the Appl y same en d-t ype on all end s checkbox.

8.

Click the Start list, and then select a start end type for the component. Click the End , Left, and Right lists, and then select the necessary end types.

9.

Type the part number in the Part Number box.

10. Enter a description of the table in the Description box. 11. Click OK . The new data table appears in the Main Table List View with the name in the upper left corner and is also displayed in Catalog Data under the category selected from the Select a category step.


See Also Add MAINSIZE (on page 45) Add New MAINSIZE (on page 45) Component Tables (on page 75)

Add n ew u ser sh ape Adds a user shape to the specification. If Spec Editor is already displayed skip to step 2. 1.

Click Start Spec Editor desktop.

on the spec view palette. Alternatively, click Spec Edito r on the

The Specification Editor software opens.

2.

Click File > Open . The Open File dialog box displays.

3. Select a catalog, and then click Open . The Catalog Data window displays.

4. Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder. The Data Tables list displays.

5. Right-click User Shapes, and select Ad d Dat a Tabl e

.

The New Usershape Table displays.


48

Home Catalog Tab 6.


7.

Select a user type in the Type list.

8.

Select a size table in the Size Table list. You can select and clear multiple sizes by clicking the Size Table ellipsis.

9. Select the Reducing Component check box if you want this to be a reducing component. 10. Type the user shape folder name in the Usershape Folder box. 11. Type the part number in the Part Number box. 12. Type the description of the user shape in the Description box. 13. Click OK . The user shape file appears under the User Shape category in the Data Tables folder , and also to the right of Catalog Data, in the Main Table List View.

14. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog. You can now enter information for the specifics of the user shape that you have added to this specification catalog. For more information, see Add a new data table in CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide.

See Also Add MAINSIZE (on page 45) Add New MAINSIZE (on page 45)

Add n ew t op wo rks tabl e 1.

Click the (+) sign on the Data Tables folder in Catalog Data. The Data Tables file expands displaying the categories.

2. Select Topworks. 3. Click the Home tab, and then click Data Table

on the Add Tabl e panel. Alternatively,

right-click Topworks in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Dat a Tabl e

.

The New Topwor ks Table dialog box displays.

4. Type the name of the new topworks table in the Name box. 5. Click the Type list, and then select the type. 6. Click the Size Table list, and then select a s ize table. Next, click the Size Table ellipsis, select the sizes to add from the Select Size list, and then click OK . 7. Enter a description of the table in the Description box. 8. Click OK . The new topworks table appears in the Main Table List View with the name of the table in the upper left corner, and in the Catalog Data under the category you selected in the Data Tables folder.


See Also Add MAINSIZE (on page 45) Add New MAINSIZE (on page 45)


49

Home Catalog Tab

Edit data table featur es Right-click Menu Ad d User Part Num ber Col um n

Automatically adds the User Part Number Colu mn which can be used to assign component record-level part numbers (PTN)s to component data. Ad d Cu st om Data To Al l Tabl es

Displays the New Field dialog box enabling you to create a new field for all the components in the Data Tables. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 72). Remove All Tables

Removes all the data tables from the catalog. All data tables must be removed, before the endtype tables can be removed. Open



Removes the selected component from the data table list. Rename

Renames the selected component. Select the component to be renamed, and then enter a new name. Expand

Expands the data table list. Collapse

Collapses the data table list. Expand All

Expands all the table lists. Collapse All

Collapses all the table lists. Properties

Displays the Properties view. Ad d t o b ase c atal og

Adds the selected table file to the base catalog. Commit t o Base Catalog

Commits the changes to the category to the base catalog. Update from Base Catalog

Updates the selected category with changes made to the b ase catalog. You are now provided the ability to move the component tables under the Data Tables folder. To change the order of the components, click the component and then drag it to the new location in the list. For more information on data tables, see Data Tables Properties (on page 179).


50

Home Catalog Tab Right-click Menu Main Table List View Ad d M AINSIZE

Adds a main size. For more information, see Add MAINSIZE (on page 45). Ad d New M AINSIZE

Adds a new main size. For more information, see Add New MAINSIZE (on page 45). Remove Row

See Remove Row (on page 25). Cut

See Cut (on page 25). Copy

See Copy (on page 24). Paste

See Paste (on page 23). Show Required

Displays the required information. Show Enhancement

Displays the enhancements. Show User

Displays the user information.

IndexCode Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > IndexCode Table Enables you to add an IndexCode table that can then be associated with a DBCodes table. The IndexCode Tables folder contains the INDEXCODE, DESCRIPTION, and COMPTYPE of each component in the catalog. Name

Specifies the name of the index code table. Description

Specifies the description of the index code table. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26). For information on the properties, see IndexCode Tables Properties (on page 236).

Add In dex Code Table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click IndexCode Table on the Ad d Tab le panel. Alternatively, right-click the IndexCode Tables folder in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d Index Code Table . The New Index Code Table dialog box displays.


51

Home Catalog Tab 2.

Type the name of the index code in the Name box.

3.

Type a description of the index code in the Description box.

4.

Click OK . The index code displays under the IndexCode Tables folder in Catalog Data.

Add Data to the IndexCode 1.


2. Type the information in each box. Press TAB to navigate to the next box. 3. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog. The IndexCode cannot be removed when it is associated with a DBCode.

DBCode Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > DBCode Table Adds a database code table to Catalog Data. The DBCode Tables folder contains the database code table and the INDEXCODE, DESCRIPTION, MAINSIZE, REDSIZE, and PTN for all the components in the catalog. For more information, see DBCode Tables folder (on page 71). Name Specifies the table name. There are no restrictions on t he name. IndexCode Table Specifies the index code table associated with the DBCode Table. Description Specifies the description of the table. There are no restrictions on description.

Insert Multiple Rows Dialog Box Enables you to insert multiple rows for a DBCode Table. IndexCode Specifies the required index code associated with the database code table. Size Selection Specifies the sizes selected for the database code tab le. Select / deselect all Selects or clears all sizes in the Size Selection list. For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26). For information on the properties, see DBCode Tables Properties (on page 236).




Import DBCode Table From File (on page 53) Add DBCode Table (on page 53)


52

Home Catalog Tab

Import DBCode Table From File CADWorx Spec Editor DBCode Tables folder: Right-click the DBCode Tables folder in Catalog Data, and then select Import DBCode Table From File . Imports a database codes file and the i ndex code for use in CADWorx. The database codes file is placed in the DBCode Tables folder, and the index code is placed in the IndexCode Tables folder. The DBCode Tables folder contains the database code table and the INDEXCODE, DESCRIPTION, MAINSIZE, REDSIZE, and PTN for all the components in the catalog. The IndexCode Tables folder contains the INDEXCODE, DESCRIPTION, and COMPTYPE of each component in the catalog. DataBaseCodes File

Specifies the database codes file to im port. The database codes file is located in the Spec folder of the legacy versions. Import

Imports the database codes file. 1.

Right-click the DBCode Tables folder in Catalog Data, and then select Import DBCode Table From File. The Import DBCode From File dialog box displays.

2.

Click the DataBaseCodes File ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.

3.

Navigate to and open the database codes file. The DataBaseCodes File box populates.

4.

Click Import . The database codes file and the index code imports and displays under the DBCodes Tables folder and IndexCod e Tables folder, respectively, in Catalog Data.

See Also DBCode Table (on page 52) IndexCode Table (on page 51) IndexCode Tables Properties (on page 236) DBCode Tables Properties (on page 236)

Add DBCode Table 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click DBCode Table on the Ad d Tab les panel. Alternatively, right-click the DBCode Tables folder in Catalog Data, and then select Ad d DBCode Table. You first must create an IndexCode before you can add the DBCodes table. An index code table is required to complete the process. The New DBCode Table dialog box displays.

2. Type the name of the new database code table in the Name box.


53

Home Catalog Tab 3.

Click the IndexCode Table list, and then select the i ndex code.

4.

Enter a description of the table in the Description box.

5.

Click OK . The new database code table appears in the Main Table List View with the name in the upper left corner. The DBCodes Table also displays in Catalog Data.


Insert Row 1.


2. Type the information in each box. Press TAB to navigate to the next box. 3. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.

Insert Multiple Rows 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Insert Multiple Rows . The Insert Multiple Rows dialog box displays.

2.

Select the IndexCode from the list.

3.

Select the necessary sizes from the Size Selection list. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes.

4.

Click OK .

5.


End Prep Table CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Ad d Tab le > End Prep Table Adds an end preparation table to the Miscellaneous folder in Catalog Data. The end preparation table records the end preparation data for all the components used with CADWorx, and enables you to use t he end preparation table in th e description formation dialog boxes. You can also use this command to c reate different end prep tables for use i n CADWorx. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) and Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139). Name

Specifies the table name. There are no r estrictions on the name. Description

Specifies the description of the table. There are no restrictions on description. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number for the table. You can use the part number of the end preparation in the description format dialog box. Select End Prep table from the Component Tables list, and then click the right arrow to move the item to the Format box. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) and Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139). You can edit this number.


54

Home Catalog Tab End Prep Table Fields Name

Specifies the name of the end preparation. The name is the actual information that displa ys in CADWorx for the end preparation of a component. The end preparation data works in conjunction with the PipeDescriptionCat variable. For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. Description

Specifies the description of the component. The description accurately depicts t he meaning of the three-letter Name. You can edit the description. PTN

Specifies the part number of the end preparation. Select END_PREP_PTN in the description format dialog boxes to show part numbers for end preparation in your model. For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139) and Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86). For all right-click and editing features, see Edit table features (on page 26). For more information, see Miscellaneous folder (on page 72).


Add a new end prep table (on page 55)



Add Standard EndPrep (on page 56)



Edit end prep table (on page 56)

Add a new end prep t abl e 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click End Prep Table on the Add Table panel. Alternatively, right-click Miscellaneous in Catalog Data, and then select Add En d Pr ep Table

.

The New End Prep Table dialog box displays.

2.


3.

Type the description of the table in the Description box.

4.

Change or accept the Default Part Number .

5.

Click OK . The new end prep table displays in the Main Table List View with the name that you typed at the top left, and also displays in Catalog Data under the Miscellaneous folder.

6.



55

Home Catalog Tab

Add Standard EndPr ep 1.

Right-click the Main Table List View, and then click Ad d St and ard End Prep . The Select end prep fr om templ ate dialog box displays.

2.

Select the end prep items to add, and then click OK . Use the Select / deselect all check box to select or clear all sizes. The end preps selected display in the Main Table List View.

3.


Edit end prep table 1.

Double-click an end prep table file under Miscellaneous in Catalog Data. The table displays to the right of the Catalog Data in the Main Table List View.

2.


3.


4.



Legacy Catalog Data Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data Imports legacy data to the Spec Editor. Import By Spec - Imports legacy data from a specification. For more information, see Import By Spec (on page 57). Import From Data File - Imports legacy data from a file. For more information, see Import From Data File (on page 58). Pipe Support Import Assembly - Imports legacy pipe support data from an assembly file. For more information, see Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File (on page 61). Pipe Support Import Data - Imports legacy pipe support data from a data file. For more information, see Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File (on page 62).


56

Home Catalog Tab

Impor t B y Spec CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data > Import B y Spec Imports legacy data from a specification. Specification File

Specifies the specification file for import. Library Folder

Specifies the location for the legacy components folder f or import. This must be located in the legacy CADWorx folders. Topworks Folder

Specifies the location for the topworks folder for im port. This must be located in the legacy CADWorx folders. DatabaseCodes Fil e

Specifies the legacy database code DAT file for the import. Upon import of the DAT file the DBCode Table, and the IndexCode Table, are created accordingly. For more information on DBCode Tables and IndexCode Tables , see IndexCode Table (on page 51) and DBCode Table (on page 52). Size Table

Specifies the size table for the im port. You must first create a size table before importing the legacy data. Data Files

Specifies the imported information. 

Path

Specifies the path for the legacy data. 

Status

Specifies the status of the selected data. If Status is Missing, then the incorrect Library Folder was selected. Import

Imports the legacy data. View Log File

Displays the log file for the legacy import. 1. Click the Home tab, and then click Import By Spec panel.

on the Legacy Catalog Data

The Import CADWorx Legacy Catalog From Spec File dialog box displays.

2. Under Source, click the Specification File ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.


57

Home Catalog Tab 3.

Select a legacy file to import, and then click Open . The Data Files box Files box fills with the legacy data.

4.

Click the Library Folder ellipsis. ellipsis. The Brows e For For Folder dialog dialog box displays.

5. Select the the legacy folder that contains the data file, and then click OK . 6. Click the Topworks Folder ellipsis. ellipsis. The Brows e For For Folder dialog dialog box displays.

7. Select the legacy legacy folder that contains the topworks topworks data file for the spec, and then click OK . 8. Click the DatabaseCodes File ellipsis. The Open dialog Open dialog box displays.

9. Select the legacy database code DAT file for the import, and then click Open . The DatabaseCodes File box File box fills with the DAT file. DAT file. See the note above the instructions for more information.

10. Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table. 11. Select the data files you want to import from the Data Files box, and then click OK . Alternatively, select the Select / deselect all check box to select all legacy data in the Data Files dialog box. 12. Click Import . One of the following two responses displays: No files were converted, or [Number] files converted . If no files were converted, make sure the data to import is correct. 13. Click OK on either message you receive. 14. When finished with the import, click Close. 15. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.





For detailed detailed information about the contents contents that that were were or were not converted, click View Log File. You can double-click any of the data files in the Data Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Import From Data Fil File e File CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data > Import From Data File

Imports legacy data from a file. Ad d Fi les

Imports legacy data using chosen files. Ad d Fo ld er

Imports legacy data using chosen folders.


58

Home Catalog Tab Delete

Deletes a selected source from the Source Files box. Source Files

Specifies the selected files or folders for im port. Converted Files

Specifies the files converted after import. Size Table

Specifies the size table for validation of import. By Column Count

Specifies all the data file t ypes for each source in the Source Files box. This option is only CADWorx L egacy Catalog Catalog From Data Data File dialog box. available in the Import CADWorx By Column Name

Specifies the data files for the source file you have selected. This option is only available in CADWorx L egacy Catalog Catalog From Data Data File dialog box. the Import CADWorx Select Data File Type

Specifies the component type for the specification im port. Import

Imports the legacy data. View View Log File

Displays the log file for the l egacy import. There are two options for importing data from the data files. Depending on which kind of data Ad d Fol der . you want to import, use Ad d Fi les or Add

Import using Add Files 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Import From Data File panel.

on the Legacy Data

The Import CADWorx CADWorx Legacy Catalog Catalog From Data File dialog File dialog box displays.

2.

Ad d Fi les Click Add

.

The Open dialog Open dialog box displays.

3. Select a legacy file to import, and then click Open . The file displays in the Source Files box. Files box.


59

Home Catalog Tab 4.

Select a source file, and then under Validation , select a size table from the Size Table list. The data file type displays in the Select Data File Type box. Type box.

Selecting By Column Name or By Column Count determines how information is displayed in the Select Data File Type box. Selecting By Column Count displays all the data file types for each source in the Source Files box. Alternatively, selecting By Column Name only displays the data files for the source file you have s elected. Some selections in Source Files do not have data fi le information. 5.

Select a data data file type from the Select Data File Type box. Only one data file type can be selected at a time. The data file type needs to be set for each source file listed in the Source Files box.

6.

Click Import . The converted file displays in the Converted Files box. Files box.

These steps can be repeated without needing to close the dialog box. 7.

Click Close when finished.

8.




View Log File. To see information about the data conversion, click View



You can double-click any of the data files in the Source Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Import using Add Folders 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Import From Data File Data panel.

on the Legacy Catalog

The Import Legacy Data Data From File dialog File dialog box displays.

2.

Ad d Fo ld er Click Add

.

The Brows e For For Folder dialog dialog box displays.

3.

Select a legacy folder to import, and then click Open . The entire folder displays in the Source Files box. Files box.

4.

Select a source file, and then then under Validation , select a size table from the Size Table list. The data file type displays in the Select Data File Type box.

Selecting By Column Name or By Column Count determines how information is displayed in the Select Data File Type box. Selecting By Column Count displays all the data file types for each source in the Source File box. Alternatively, selecting By Column Name only displays the data files for the source file you have s elected. Some selections in Source Files do not have data file information. If you need to delete a file from Source Files simply select the file, and then click Delete . The file no longer displays in source files.


60

Home Catalog Tab 5.

Select a data data file type from the Select Data File Type box. Only one data file type can be selected at a time. The data file type needs to be set for each source file listed in the source files box.

6.

Click Import . The converted file displays in the Converted Files box. Files box.

These steps can be repeated without having to close the dialog box. 7.


8.






To see why something something was not converted, converted, or what, where, and and when it was converted, click View View Log File. You can double-click any of the data files in the Source Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Impor t Pipe Support Support Legacy Legacy From Assembly File CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data > Pipe Support Import Assembly

Suppor t Legacy From From Ass embly File Catalog Data: Right-click the catalog > Import Pipe Suppor

Imports legacy pipe support data from an assembly file . For more information, see PipeSupport (on page 206) page 206).. As sem bl y Fi le

Specifies the assembly file for import. Library Folder

Specifies the location for the legacy components folder f or import. This must be located in the legacy CADWorx folders. Size Table

Specifies the size table for the import. You must first create a size table before importing the legacy data. Data Files

Specifies the imported information. 

Path

Specifies the path for the legacy data. 

Status

Specifies the status of the selected data. If Status is Missing, then the incorrect Library Folder was was selected.


61

Home Catalog Tab Import


Displays the log file for the legacy import. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Pipe Support Import Assembly on the Legacy Catalog Data panel. Alternatively, click in Catalog Data, right-click the catalog, and then From Ass embly File. select Import Pipe Support Legacy From The Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File dialog File dialog box displays.

2.

Under Source, click the As sem bl y Fi le ellipsis. The Open dialog Open dialog box displays.

3.

Select a legacy file to import, and then click Open . The Data Files box Files box fills with the legacy data.

4.

Click the Library Folder ellipsis. ellipsis. The Brows e For For Folder dialog dialog box displays.

5. Select the the legacy folder that contains the data file, and then click OK . 6. Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table. 7. Select the the data files you want to to import from the the Data Files box, and then click OK . Alternatively, select the Select / deselect all check box to select all legacy data in the Data Files dialog box. 8. Click Import . One of the following two responses displays: No files were converted, or [Number] files converted . If no files were converted, mak e sure the data to import is correct. 9. Click OK on either message you receive. 10. When finished with the import, click Close. 11. Click File > Save to save the changes to the catalog.





For detailed detailed information about the contents contents that that were were or were not converted, click View Log File. You can double-click any of the data files in the Data Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Import Pipe Supp Support ort Legacy From Data File CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Catalog Data > Pipe Support Impor t Data Suppor t Legacy From Data File File Catalog Data: Right-click the catalog > Import Pipe Suppor

Imports legacy pipe support data from a data fi le.


62

Home Catalog Tab Ad d Fi les

Imports legacy data using chosen files. Ad d Fo ld er

Imports legacy data using chosen folders. Delete

Deletes a selected source from the Source Files box. Source Files

Specifies the selected files or folders for im port. Converted Files

Specifies the files converted after import. Size Table

Specifies the size table for validation of import. Select Data File Type

Specifies the component type for the specification import. Import


Displays the log file for the legacy import. There are two options for importing data from the data f iles. Depending on which kind of data you want to import, use Ad d Fi les or Add Fol der .

Import using Add Files 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Pipe Suppor t Import Data on the Legacy Catalog Data panel. Alternatively, click in Catalog Data, right-click the catalog, and then select Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File. The Import Pipe Suppor t Legacy From Data File dialog box displays.

2.

Click Add Fi les

.

The Open dialog box displays.

3.

Select a legacy file to import, and then click Open . The file displays in the Source Files box.

4.

Select a source file, and then under Validation , select a size table from the Size Table list. The data file type displays in the Select Data File Type box.

5.

Select a data file type from the Select Data File Type box. Only one data file type can be selected at a time. The data file type needs to be set for each source file listed in the Source Files box.


63

Home Catalog Tab 6.

Click Import . The converted file displays in the Converted Files box.

These steps can be repeated without needing to close the dialog box. 7.


8.




To see information about the data conversion, click View Log File.



You can double-click any of the data files in the Source Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.

Import using Add Folders 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Pipe Suppor t Import File on the Legacy Catalog Data panel. Alternatively, click in Catalog Data, right-click the catalog, and then select Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File. The Import Pipe Suppor t Legacy From Data File dialog box displays.

2.

Click Add Fo ld er

.

The Brows e For Folder dialog box displays.

3.

Select a legacy folder to import, and then click Open . The entire folder displays in the Source Files box.

4.

Select a source file, and then under Validation , select a size table from the Size Table list. The data file type displays in the Select Data File Type box.

5.

Select a data file type from the Select Data File Type box. Only one data file type can be selected at a time. The data file type needs to be set for each source file listed in the source files box.

6. Click Import . The converted file displays in the Converted Files box.

These steps can be repeated without having to close the dialog box. 7.


8.






To see why something was not converted, or what, where, and when it was converted, click View Log File. You can double-click any of the data files in the Source Files dialog box to view its information in Notepad.


64

Home Catalog Tab

Transf er Data Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Transfer Data Enables you to transfer data from one catalog to a nother catalog, or from one project to another project. Catalog Data - Copies data from one catalog to a nother catalog. For example, the source catalog data can be copied to the target catalog. For more information, see Catalog Data (on page 65). Project Data - Copies data from a project containing pipe support libraries or a separate pipe support libraries file to another project. For more information, see Project Data (on page 66). Support Data - Copies data from one pipe support libraries file to another pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Support Data (on page 68).

Catalog Data CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Transfer Data > Catalog Data Copies data from one catalog to another catalog. For example, the source catalog data can be copied to the target catalog. Source

Specifies the source file for the catalog transfer. Target

Specifies the target file for the catalog transfer. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Catalog Data

on the Transfer Data panel.

You can conduct data transfers for projects, catalogs, and pipe supports while working in a catalog, a project, or a pipe support library. The Would you lik e to use the current catalog for target? dialog box displays. This only displays when you have a catalog open.

2.

Click Yes to use the current catalog. OR Click No to use a different catalog. The Transfer Catalog Data dialog box displays.

3.

Click Open Catalog

next to the small Source box.


4. Select a catalog to copy data from, and then click Open . The data displays in the large and small Source boxes.


65

Home Catalog Tab 5. Select New Catalog

to transfer to a new catalog.

The New Catalog dialog box displays.

Complete using the information in New Catalog (on page 17). OR Select Open Catalog

, next to the small Target box, to transfer to an existing catalog.

The Open dialog box displays depending on your selection.

Select the source catalog and then click Open . The data displays in the small and large Target boxes.

6.

Click and drag the table file information from the Source box to the Target box. Alternatively, you can right-click a source, and then Copy /Paste the source into the Target box.

7. Click Save Catalog

to save the changes.

8. Click Close when finished.

Project Data CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Transfer Data > Project Data Copies data from one project containing pipe sup port libraries or a separate pipe s upport libraries file to another project. For example, the source project data copies to the target project data. Source

Specifies the source file for the project and pipe support data transfer. Target

Specifies the target file for the project transfer. You cannot select a pipe support libraries file as the target when using the Project Data option. To transfer data from a pipe support libraries file to a separate pipe support libraries file (.psl) you must use the Support Data option. 1. Click the Home tab, and then click Project Data

in the Transfer Data panel.

You can conduct data transfers for projects, catalogs, and pipe supports while working in a catalog, a project, or a pipe support library. The Would you like to use the current project for target? dialog box displays.

This only displays when you have a project open. 2.

Click Yes to use the current project. OR Click No to use a different project. The Transfer Project Data dialog box displays.

3.

Click Open




66

Home Catalog Tab 4.

Select a project to copy data from, and then click Open . OR Select the file type list next to File Name, select Pipe Support Li braries File (*.psl), select a pipe support libraries file, and then click Open. You can transfer pipe support data from a project or a pipe support libraries file during the same transfer data session. The data displays in the large and small Source boxes.

5. Select New

to create and transfer to a new project.

The New Project dialog box displays.

Complete using the information in New Project (on page 18). OR Select Open

next to the small Target box, to transfer to an existing project.


Select the target project, and then click Open . The data displays in the small and large Target boxes.

6.

Click and drag the specification and pipe support data from the Source box to the Target box. You can copy data from the loaded source project to the loaded target project by drag and drop. You can also right-click the source, select Copy, and then Paste to the target. You can delete target project data by selecting the applicable component with right-click, and then clicking Delete.

7.

Click Save


8.

Click Close when finished. The CADWorx Spec Editor dialog box displays, telling you the project has been modified outside the application, and asking if you would like to reload it.

9.

Click OK to load OR Click Cancel to exit. The CADWorx Spec Editor dialog box displays when you click OK, asking if you would like to load from the base catalog.

10. Click Yes to load base catalog. OR Click No to not load the base catalog. The project reloads with the changes.

11. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project.


67

Home Catalog Tab

Support Data CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Transfer Data > Support Data Copies data from one pipe support libraries f ile to another pipe support li braries file. For example, the source pipe support data copies to the target pipe support data. Source

Specifies the source file for the pipe support libraries file transfer. Target

Specifies the target file for the pipe support l ibraries file transfer. You can select a project as the source, but you can only transfer the pi pe support libraries data from the project to the pipe su pport libraries file. To transfer data from a project and pipe support libraries file to a separate project (.prj), you must use the Project Data option. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Support Data

in the Transfer Data panel.

Data transfers for projects, catalogs, and pipe supports can be co nducted while working in a catalog, a project, or a pipe support library. The Would you lik e to use the current pipe suppor t libr aries for target? dialog box displays.

This only displays when you have a pipe support libraries file open. 2.

Click Yes to use the current pipe support libraries file. OR Click No to use a different pipe support libraries file. The Transfer Project Data dialog box displays.

3.

Click Open Pipe Support Libraries



4. Select a pipe support libraries file to copy data from, and then click Open . OR Select the file type list next to File Name, select Project File (*.prj), select a project, and then click Open. You can transfer pipe support data from a project or a pipe support libraries file during the same transfer data session. The data displays in the large and small Source boxes.


68

Home Catalog Tab 5.

Click New Pipe Support Librari es file.

to create and transfer to a new pipe support libraries

The New Pipe Support Li braries dialog box displays.

Complete using the information in New Pipe Support Libraries (on page 20). OR Click Open Pipe Support Libraries existing pipe support libraries file.

next to the small Target box, to transfer to an


Select the target pipe support libraries file, and then click Open . The data displays in the small and large Target boxes.

6.

Click and drag the pipe support data from the Source box to the Target box. You can copy data from the loaded source pipe support data to the lo aded target pipe support data by drag and drop. You can rig ht-click the source, select Copy, and then Paste to the target. You can delete target pipe support data by selecting the applicable d ata with right-click, and then clicking Delete.

7. Click Save


8. Click Close when finished.

Export Data Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home Catalog tab: Export Data Exports data to a text document or an Excel document. Export Table To Text Excel - Exports the table selected to a t ext document. For more information, see Export Table To Text Excel (on page 69).

Export Table To Text Excel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Export Data > Export Table To Text Excel Exports data from the selected table to a text document. 1.

Open a catalog file, and then select a table.

2.

On the Home tab, click Export Table To Text Excel on the Export Data panel. Alternatively, right-click and select Export Table To Text Excel . The Save As dialog box displays.

3. In the Save As Type list, select Text Files (*.txt) or Excel Files (*.xls). 4. Select or create a folder to save the document, and then click Save. The text document saves to the selected folder.

To view the document open it in Windows Explorer .


69

SECTION 4

View Catalog Tab Select a check box to open each window. Display - Displays the Catalog Data, Base Catalog Data, Properties, Component Tables , EndType Tables , and Component Types windows. For more information, see Display Panel (on page 70).

Display Panel CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display Enables you to view the following windows. Catalog Data - Displays all the data loaded in a catalog, and enables you to manipulate the data. For more information, see Catalog Data (on page 70). Base Catalog Data - Displays all the information in the base catalog. For m ore information, see Base Catalog Data (on page 72). Properties - Displays the properties of all the data in t he catalog. For more information, see Properties (on page 72). Component Tables - Lists all the components by table name and version. For more information, see Component Tables (on page 75). EndType Tables - Lists of all the end types by table n ame and version. For more information, see EndType Tables (on page 75). Component Types - Displays all component types available in the specification editor and enables you to change the names as needed. For more information, see Component Types (on page 75).

Catalog Data CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Catalog Data Displays all the data loaded in a catalog, and enables you to manipulate the data. Catalog Data displays when you open an existing catalog or create a new catalog. Selecting Catalog Data hides or displays the Catalog Data View .

Size Tables fo lder Contains all the size, bolt di ameter, and bolt length data for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the size, bolt diam eter, and bolt length data by adding new tables, and by changing existing tables. All tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by rightclicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see Size Table (on page 30), Bolt Diameter Table (on page 32), and Bolt Length Table (on page 35).


70

View Catalog Tab

Material Tables fol der Contains all the material data for the com ponents in CADWorx. You can manipulate the material data by adding new material tables, and by changing existing material tables. Material tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see Material Table (on page 38).

Schedule Tables folder Contains all the schedule data for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the schedule data by adding new schedule tables, and by changing existing schedule tables. Schedule tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see Schedule Table (on page 40).

Thickness Tables f older Contains all the thickness data for the com ponents in CADWorx. You can manipulate the thickness data by adding new thickness tables, and by changing existing thickness tables. Thickness tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see Thickness Table (on page 42).

EndType Tables fol der Contains all the end type d ata for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the end type data by adding new end type tables, and by changing existing endtype tables. Endtype tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For m ore information, see End Type Table (on page 43).

Data Tables fol der Contains all the category and component data for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the category and component data by adding new data tables and categories, and b y changing existing data tables and ca tegories. Data tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see Data Table (on page 46).

IndexCode Tables fol der Contains index code data for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the data by adding new information or by changing existing data. Index code tables can be op ened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. The index code cannot be deleted when it is associated with a DBCode table. For more information, see IndexCode Table (on page 51).

DBCode Tables f old er Contains database codes data for the components in CADWorx. You can manipulate the data by adding database code tables, or by changing existing data. DBCode Tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays. For more information, see DBCode Table (on page 52).


71

View Catalog Tab

Miscellaneous f older Contains miscellaneous data for the components in CADWorx, such as end prep data. You can manipulate the data by adding tables, or by changing existing data. Miscellaneous tables can be opened, deleted, and added in Catalog Data by right-clicking the file or table, and then using the menu that displays.

Base Catalog Data CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Base Catalog Data Displays all the information in the base catalog for Spec Editor. The base catalog information can be displayed by clicking the Base Catalog Data check box in the Display panel. Ad d t o c atal og - Adds the selected table information from the base catalog to the open catalog. Refresh base catalog - Refreshes the base catalog. Open base catalog - Opens the base catalog for editing.

When you change the base catalog, the software prompts you with a Reload message box. Click Yes to reload and update the base catalog. If you click No , you can click Refresh base catalog to accomplish the same thing.

Properties CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Properties Displays the properties of the specific data you have selected in the catalog. You can use the Properties view to change the asp ects of a specification, project, catalog, or catalog table f ile. The table folders do not have properties. Selecting the Fields ellipsis or double-clicking Custom Data brings up the New Field or Edit Field dialog box. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 72). Each category in Data Tables displays different components. Each component has its own specific information under properties, as well as a picture of the component. Different types of available options vary by component. Some components have available options that others do not ha ve. You can find the property explanations i n the Appendix.

See Also Property Descriptions (on page 162)

New Field Dialog Bo x CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Custom Data Double-clicking Custom Data opens the New Field dialog box and enables you to add new information to the properties of the specification data. T he New Field dialog box opens any time you click Custom Data in the Properties view. User Defined fields created using the Custom Data option automatically turn the names of those fields into Keywords. If you create custom fields with Keywords that already exist in the Spec Editor, the new keyword does not display in the Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139). The keyword already exists, and the software does not recognize identical keywords.


72

View Catalog Tab Name Specifies a name for the new field. T his name becomes the Keyword and cannot be changed after creation. When creating custom data, numbers, letters, the hyphen (-), and the underscore (_) are the only permissible characters. No other specia l characters are allowed. Title Specifies a title for the new field. The column takes the title from the text in this box and can be edited at any time. If you change this title in Properties , the column title changes as well. However, the Name (Keyword) remains the same. Best practice calls for the Name and the Title to match. Description Specifies a description of the information in the new field. This box is simply a note for you to understand why this field is being created. Data Type Specifies the type of data. The types of data a llowed are Real , Integer , Text , or List . After you click OK you can no longer edit this option. Real Only allows real number characters in the Default Value box. Integer Only allows integer number characters in the Default Value box. Text Only allows alpha characters in the Default Value box. List Enables you to create a list of items to use for the custom data. You can create data in the list, and then select it from the Default Value list. To change this list, select the ellipsis to the left of the Data Type list. When you select the List option, the software activates the dialog box and then the el lipsis. For more information, see List Items Dialog Box (on page 74). Required Input Specifies whether the information you are creating requires input f rom you. Validatio n Rule Specifies the validation rule for the custom data. This field is unavailable for edit. Default Value Specifies the default value to of the custom data. If the List option is selected, a list of items displays here. This list of items is based on the data created in the List Items Dialog Box (on page 74). At tac h Fi eld to Com po nen ts Attaches the custom data field to the component. Clear the At tac h Fi eld to Com po nen ts check box if you do not want the custom data to appear in the model. Selecting this option allows for the custom data you are creating to sh ow up in the model, including the database, and bill of materials. If you attach the property to a component, you can turn that property off by opening the already added property and clearing the check box. Any new component drawn after that point does not contain the property. If you run CONVERTFROMPRJDATA on the previously create components, and have cleared this option, the custom data is removed. 








Create a new properties field (on page 74)



Edit a field (on page 75)


73

View Catalog Tab List Items Dialog Box Enables you to make a list of items for custom data. With the List option you can create different values for the same custom data. For instance, if you create a custom data field called Manufacture, you can create a list of different manufactures, and then apply those manufactures to each separate component. The list of items you create is selected in the Default Value box. The list becomes available after creation. To change the text or values you created in the List Items dialog box in the Main Table List View or the Main Table Spec View, select the c olumn with the custom data, and then select a new item from the list. Item

Displays the list of items you create. New

Enables you to create new items in the list for custom data. Delete

Enables you to delete the items from the list for custom data.

Right-click Menu New

Enables you to create new items in the list for custom data. Edit

Enables you to rename the custom data item in the list. Delete

Enables you to delete the items from the list for custom data. To select the Default Value after you create a list, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 72).

Create a new properties field 1.

Open a project, and then select a specification or the project. OR Open a catalog, and then select a table.

2.

Click the View tab, and then click Properties in the Display panel.

3.

Double-click Custom Data. Alternatively, right-click Custom Data, and then click Ad d . You can right-click from within a catalog, and then select Add Cu st om Data To A ll Tables . However, the Thickness Tables folder does not c ontain this option. The software adds the custom data you create to all the tables in that folder. The New Field dialog box displays.

4.

Type a name in the Name box.

5.

Type a title in the Title box.


74

View Catalog Tab 6.

Type a description in the Description box.

7.

Select the Data Type list, and then select a data type. If you select List , do the following: a. In the List Items dialog box, click New to appear in Custom Data.

and then type the information that you want

b. Repeat step A for different items. Each line constitutes a new selection in Default Value. c. Click OK . 8.

In the Requir ed Input list, select Yes or No .

9.

Type a default value in the Default Value box. If you selected List, that information is now listed here. Select an item from the list.

10. If you want to attach new custom data to the component, then select the At tac h Fiel d t o Components check box. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 72). 11. Click OK . The new field is added to the properties window.

Edit a field 1.

Click the View tab, and then click Properties in the Display panel.

2.

Select a field in Fields and click the ellipsis. The Edit Field dialog box displays.

3.

Update the necessary fields, and then click OK .

You can remove an attached custom data field from a component, table, or specification by clearing the Ap pl y Fi eld s t o Co mp on ent s check box.

Component Tables CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Component Tables Shows a listing of all the components by TABLENAME, AUTHOR , and PTN (Part Number). To view the component tables, click the View tab, and then select the Component Table check box in the Display panel. The Component Tables display on the Main Table List View.

EndType Tables CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: EndType Tables Shows a listing of all the end types by table name and version. To view the endtype list, click the View tab, and then click EndType Tables on the Display panel. The EndType Tables displays on the Main Table List View.

Component Types CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Component Types Shows a listing of all the components by COMPTYPE NAME and Program Code. Enables you to define a DEFINED COMPTYPE.


75

View Catalog Tab COMPTYPE NAME

Specifies the component type name of each component in the Specification Editor. You cannot edit this it is hard coded in the system. DEFINED COMPTYPE

Specifies a defined component type name for each component. Changing this text changes the appearance of the long description in the specification. Program Code

Specifies the program code for the component. This program code ide ntifies the component in the Component Edit dialog box in the Component type box. You cannot edit this, it is hard coded in the system. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. 

To view the component types, click the View tab while working in a catalog, and then select the Component Types check box in the Display panel. The Component Types display on the Main Table List View.

Change how the COMPTYPE format displays in t he Project Descript ion Formats 1.

Enter a value into the DEFINED COMPTYPE box, and then save the catalog.

2.

Open the corresponding specification.

3. If the Reload message box displays, click Yes . If the update from base catalog message box disp lays, click Yes . One or both of these dialog boxes displays. If you do not receive the update message box, then the catalog was not sa ved, or the wrong project was opened. 4. Open a specification, and click on the component for which you changed the value in the DEFINED COMPTYPE box. If the value is not changed, then you need to set the components description format or the specifications description format for the change to take effect. For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139) and Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86).


76

SECTION 5

Home Project Tab Gives you access to the features in an open project. Clipboard - Enables you to edit the boxes within the Spec Editor. For more information, see Clipboard Panel (on page 23). Specification - Enables you to add specifications to the project. For more information, see Specification Panel (on page 77). Pipe Suppor t - Enables you to add pipe supports to the project. For more information, see Pipe Support Panel (on page 105). Catalog - Enables you to update the project with changes made to the base catalog. For more information, see Catalog Panel (on page 108). Legacy Specificatio n - Enables you to import legacy specifications. For more information, see Legacy Specification Panel (on page 111). Transfer Data - Enables you to transfer project, catalog, and pipe support data. For m ore information, see Transfer Data Panel (on page 65). Export/Import Data - Enables you to export data to either a text document or a n Excel document. You can also import specification data back into the Specification Editor from an Excel file. For more information, see Export/Import Data Panel (on page 112). Editing - Finds and replaces values in the Spec Editor. For more information, see Editing Panel (on page 124). Exit Spec Editor - Closes the Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor.

Specification Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Specification Enables you to add information to a project. Ad d Spec if ic ati on - Adds a specification to the project. For more information, see Add Specification (on page 77).

Add Speci ficati on CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Specification > Add Specification Adds a specification to a project.


77

Home Project Tab Name Specifies the name of the specification. Catalog Specifies the base catalog. Weight Factor Specifies the weight factor of the specification. This option is used for various margins of component weights, such as paint weights, and weld weights. Component Class Specifies the class type specification for the component. Temperature Rating Specifies the maximum allowable temperature for the component. Pressure Rating Specifies the maximum allowable pressure for the component. DBCode Table Specifies the database code table from the base catalog. Size Table Specifies the size table used in the base catalog. Av ail abl e Size Specifies the available sizes of the size table. These can be changed by selecting or clearing the check boxes in the list. Thickness Table Specifies the thickness table used in the base catalog. Material Table Specifies the material table used in the base catalog. Layer Name Specifies the layer name. By default this name is the name of the spec, but the na me can be changed. Layer Color Specifies the color appearance of the components when using this specification to draw. Select 0 - ByLayer , 1 - Red , 2 - Yello w , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 White/Black, from the list or type 0 through 255 to specify other colors. Created By Specifies the name of the person who created the specification. Description Specifies the description of the specification.


New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80)



Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86)



Add a new specification (on page 79)



Add single new component to a spec (on page 89)



Add Multi Component Pane (on page 91)



Add multiple new components to a spec (on page 93)


78

Home Project Tab

Add a new sp eci fi cat ion 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Add Spec if ic ati on on the Specification panel. Alternatively, right-click the project name in the Project Specs window, and then click Ad d Specification . The New Specificatio n dialog box displays.

2.

Type the name of the new spec in the Name box.

3.

Use the default catalog, or click the Catalog ellipsis for a new catalog. When the Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays, select a catalog, and then click Open .

4.

Type the weight factor in the Weight Factor box. The weight factor accounts for the various margins of the com ponent weight, such as paint weight, and weld weight.

5.

Type the component class in the Component Class box.

6.

Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.

7.

Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.

8.

Click the DBCode Table list, and then select a database code table.

9.

Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table.

10. Use the Av ail abl e Size list to select or clear sizes. 11. Click the Thickness Table list, and then select a thickness table. 12. Click the Thickness Table ellipsis to specify schedules for specific thickness types, using the Schedule Assignment dialog box that displays. Click OK when finished. 13. Click the Material Table list, and then select a material table. 14. Click the Material Table ellipsis to assign material for specific data types, using the Material As si gn men t dialog box that displays. Click OK when finished. 15. Click Long Desc Format, and then complete the dialog box as needed. 16. Click Part Number Format, and then complete the dialog box as needed. 17. Click Short Desc Format, and then complete the dialog box as needed. 18. Click Tag Format, and then complete the dialog box a s needed. Click OK in each dialog box when finished. For more information on the f ormat dialog boxes, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139). 19. Type a layer name in the Layer Name box, select one from the list, or use the default la yer name. 20. Click the Layer Color list, and then select a layer color. 21. Type your name in the Created By box. 22. Type a description of the specification in the Description box. 23. Click OK . 24. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project. The new spec appears under the project name in Project Specs.


79

Home Project Tab

New and Edit Compon ent Pane CADWorx Spec Editor Project Specs window: Double-click a project specification

Component Tab Enables you to add or edit components for a specification. The information in the l ist comes from the base catalog. Click Show Data Table information.

, when available, to display the Base Catalog Data and obtain more

You can copy and place any component in the Main Spec List View in the same specification or another specification in the current project.

Component Setup Group

Specifies the component to add or edit. While editing, this box is unavailable. Type

Specifies the component type for the group selected. Data Table

Specifies the specific data used for the selected type, and populates the EndType Data Table and the Sort Sequence. See the note below under the EndType Data Table subheading. When the data table is selected, the Sort Sequence auto-populates with the program code from the selected data table. Data Table Update Onl y

Specifies this is only an up date from the data table. The Data Table Update Onl y check box is only available when editing. Size Range

Specifies the sizes of the component. When you edit a component, the software derives the size ranges from the catalog data table for that component. For example, if you have only sizes 1 to 20 in your data table, only sizes 1 to 20 display in the Size Range list. If you need to add sizes to the component, you m ust first add them to the data table in the catalog, and then update your project. You must select the new si zes in the Limit Spec Size Range To list after you update your project. Otherwise, the software does not display the sizes in the Size Range list. For more information, see Specification Properties (on page 163). BOM Type

Specifies the Bill of Material type for the component. Layer Name

Specifies the layer of the component. Color Index

Specifies the color of the component in a drawing. Select 0 - ByLayer , 1 - Red , 2 - Yello w , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 - White/Black , from the list or type 0 through 255 to specify other colors.


80

Home Project Tab IndexCode Specifies the index code of the component. This index code is from the DBCodes Table in the base catalog. For more information, see DBCode Table (on page 52). Optional Component Sets the component to an optional or non-optional component. Select the Optional Component check box, to make a component an o ptional component.

EndType Enables you to define the end t ype data for all components except User Shapes Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s Specifies that the new or selected component has all the same end types. Select the Ap pl y same end t ype on all ends check box, to apply the same end types to each com ponent. If the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box is selected, the other three end type options are unavailable. Isogen Sym Specifies the Isogen symbol associated with the end t ype selected. This is the end type symbol that displays when you run Isogen Out . Refer to the example below for the Start , End , Branch1, and Branch2 descriptions.

Start

Specifies the starting point end type for the component. Use the corresponding list under Isogen Sym (1) to specify the end type s ymbol for Isogen. End

Specifies the end point end type for the com ponent. Use the corresponding list under Isogen Sym (2) to specify the end type s ymbol for Isogen. Branch1

Specifies the first branch end type for the component. Branch1 is available when the Ap pl y same end typ e on all ends check box is cleared, and the component has three connection points. Use the corresponding list under Isogen Sym (3) to specify the end type symbol for Isogen. Branch2

Specifies the second branch end type for the component. Branch2 is available when the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box is cleared, and the component has four connection points. Use the corresponding list under Isogen Sym (4) to specify the end type symbol for Isogen. When selecting a Data Table associated with any new component, that component’s EndType Data Table is automatically set to the Default End Type Data Table Setup associated with that Data Table in the catalog.


81

Home Project Tab Define Connecti on End Types Enables you to define end types and Isogen symbols for connection points on a user shape. You can only view this option with a user shape selected. Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s

Specifies that all connection points have the same end types. Select the Appl y s ame en d type to all ends check box, to apply the same end types to all connections. Connection

Enables you to select a connection point to specify the End type and the Isogen Symbol for that connection. End Type

Specifies the end type for the selected connection. Isogen Sym

Specifies the Isogen symbol for the selected connection. This defaults to the same as the End type, unless you specify otherwise.

Isogen Symbol Information Identifier

Specifies the identifier used by Isogen for the com ponent. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide. SKEY

Specifies the SKEY used by Isogen for the component. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant User's Guide.

Topworks Topworks Specifies the topworks for the component. The Topworks option is available only when the component has a topwork.

Schedule & Material Specifies the material and schedule for the component. Main

Specifies the main schedule for the component. 

Use Specificatio n Schedule

Applies the schedule from the Schedule Assignment Setup in the Specification properties. For more information, see Schedule Assignment Setup (on page 154). 

Use Pipe Schedule

Applies the schedule of the default pipe associated with the selected rating of the specification. For example, if you set a tee schedule to Use Pipe Schedule and you set the schedule of the default pipe in that rating to XXS, then the tee schedule also uses XXS. Alternatively, if you set the tee schedule to Use Pipe Schedule and set the default pipe schedule to Use Specification Schedule, then the tee uses the specification schedule as well.


82

Home Project Tab Reduction

Specifies the reduction schedule for the component. Reduction is availabl e only if the component has a reducing side. 



Use Specificatio n Schedule Applies the schedule from the Schedule Assignment Setup in the Specification properties. For more information, see Schedule Assignment Setup (on page 154). Use Pipe Schedule Applies the schedule of the default pipe associated with the selected rating of the specification. For example, if you set a tee schedule to Use Pipe Schedule and you set the schedule of the default pi pe in that rating to XXS, then the tee schedule also uses XXS. Alternatively, if you set the tee schedule to Use Pipe Schedule and set the default pipe schedule to Use Specification Schedule, then the tee uses the specification schedule as well.

Material

Specifies the material for the component. Material lists any Material Assig nment Setup applicable to the selected specification component. You can specify the material with Use Specifi cation Material, select an available material assignment setup, add new material setups with Add Mater ial Setu p , or select an available material from the list. If you want to display the material on the component, define the Material Tables fields in the Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86). 







Use Specifi cation Material Applies the material from the Material Assi gnment Setup as the default for that component type in the Specification properties. A checkmark on the material assignment setup icon designates the default material assignment setup for each component group or component type. If you remove the default from the material assignment, then the software uses the material assignments from the Component Group folder. For more information, see Material Assignment Setup (on page 144). An y L is ted Materi al As si gn men t Set up Applies the component material from the selected material assignment setup. A Sp eci fi c L is ted Materi al Applies the specific component material selected for all component sizes. Ad d Mater ial Setu p Displays the Material Assig nment dialog box with the currently selected component, where you can update the material assignment for the selected component or for all components. For more information, see Material Assignment Setup (on page 144).

Class & Rating Connection

Specifies the connection information you want to enter. Start connection Enables you to specify a start end point temperature, pressure, and class. End connection Enables you to specify an end e nd point temperature, pressure, and class. Branch 1 connection Enables you to specify a first branch e nd point temperature, pressure, and class. Branch 2 connection Enables you to specify a second branch end point temperature, pressure, and class. 








83

Home Project Tab Component Class

Specifies the class type specification for the component. Temperature Rating

Specifies the maximum allowable temperature for the component. Pressure Rating

Specifies the maximum allowable pressure for the component. Ap pl y s ame r ati ng to all end s

Applies the same rating to all end points. If you draw a valve with multiple ratings in CADWorx Plant and then attach a flange, the software prompts you when the flange and the valve rating do not match. You can select Yes to override and insert the flange. Optionally, select No , and then insert a flange with a matching rating.

Sort Sequence Sort Sequence

Specifies the location of the item in the bill of material. This number is pulled from the program code when adding a new component. However, when editing an existing component, the program code from the original selection stays the same. You have the option to leave this number as it is or change it based on the following. If you entered 999, this component is placed last in the list. If you enter 0, it is first in the list. If you set the same sort numbers for different components in the specification, CADWorx places the components in the list in an alphabetical order.

Description Long

Specifies the long description for the component. You can change t he long description, by clicking the Long ellipsis which opens the Long Description Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Long box, and then click Ap pl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and cop y them. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86). Short

Specifies the short description of the component. You can change the sh ort description, by clicking the Short ellipsis which opens the Short Description Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Short box, and then click Appl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and cop y them. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86). Tag

Specifies the tag information of the component. You can change the tag format, by clicking the Tag ellipsis which opens the Tag Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Tag box, and then click Appl y to add the information. Blue words are k eywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86).


84

Home Project Tab Part Number

Specifies the part number information of the component. You can change the part number format, by clicking the Part Number ellipsis which opens the Part Numb er Format dialog box. You can also type information in t he Part Number box, and then click App ly to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86).

Descriptions display in the Short annotation , Long annotation , Tag , and Code boxes shown in the Component Edit dialog box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Component Edit dialog box is based on the associated component definition in the specification. The com ponent definition in the specification contains fields for Short Annotation , Long Annotation , Tag , and Part Number . These boxes can be populated with text data or by setting the schema in the Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) or Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139). You can configure a description schema for the Short annotation , Long annotation , Tag , and Code boxes at the project level, the specification level, and the component level. If you define a schema at any of these levels, then the software derives the description from that level. Component level schemas take precedence over specification level schem as and specification level schemas take precedence over project level schemas. For instance, if the sub-category Nipple under Pipe in the Component List tree has a schema defined, then the information displaying in CADWorx for Nipple derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Nipple sub category, then when you place a Nipple in the model, the schema derives from the Pipe category description schema under the Component List tree. If you remove the description schema in Pipe, the description derives from the Component description schema in the Component List tree. If you delete all of the description schemas at the component level, then the software repeats the above process in ternally at the specification level. Next, the software repeats this process at the project le vel. When the description format is empty at the component le vel, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) reads Using Specification Format. If the description format is empty at the component level and at the specification level, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) reads Using Project Format . Notes

Specifies any notes attached to the component. If you receive a red exclamation or a warning triangle to identify additional detail on possible data issues.

, hover over it with your mouse

Branch Tab Enables you to set up the p ermitted branch components through a grid. Main Size NPS

Specifies the main size of the branch component.


85

Home Project Tab Branc h Size NPS

Specifies the branch size of the branch component. Grid

Specifies units of the current specification, the size values, and the components available for a branch. For more information, see Add single new component to a spec (on page 89). You can add the Straight Tee/Cross + Reducer option to the branch table, as seen below. This enables you to insert a tee or a cross with reducers based on the branch sizes. For example, if you cross a 4 i nch line with a 1.5 inch line, the software prompts you to insert a 4 inch straight cross with 4"X1.5" reducers to connect the 1.5 inch line to the 4 inch line. You must select the Straight Tee/Cross + Reducer option for each intersecting sizes of the branch table in the CADWorx Spec Editor, and then set the Appl y B ran ch Tabl e Rul e to Auto mat ic in the Piping Rules of the CADWorx Plant Setup. These settings enable CADWorx to check the branch table and provide you the Cross + Reducers and Tee + Reducer options in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Apply Branch Table Rule in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide.

Long , Shor t, Tag, and Part Number Form at Dialog Box es CADWorx Spec Editor New component pane: Click the Long , Short , Tag , or Part Number ellipsis Enables you to edit the Long description, Short description, Tag , and Part Number formats for components in a specification. Descriptions display in the Short annotation , Long annotation , Tag , and Code boxes shown in the Component Edit dialog box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Component Edit dialog box is based on the associated component definition in the specification. The com ponent definition in the specification contains fields for Short Annotation , Long Annotation , Tag , and Part Number . These boxes can be populated with text data or by setting the schema in the Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) or Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139).


86

Home Project Tab You can configure a description schema for the Short annotation , Long annotation , Tag , and Code boxes at the project level, the specification level, and the component level. If you define a schema at any of these levels, then the software derives the description from that level. Component level schemas take precedence over specification level schem as and specification level schemas take precedence over project level schemas. For instance, if the sub-category Nipple under Pipe in the Component List tree has a schema defined, then the information displaying in CADWorx for Nipple derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Nipple sub category, then when you place a Nipple in the model, the schema derives from the Pipe category description schema under the Component List tree. If you remove the description schema in Pipe, the description derives from the Component description schema in the Component List tree. If you delete all of the description schemas at the component level, then the software repeats the above process in ternally at the specification level. Next, the software repeats this process at the project le vel. When the description format is empty at the component le vel, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) reads Using Specification Format. If the description format is empty at the component level and at the specification level, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) reads Using Project Format .

Component Tables Component Tables

Lists the format types available for component tables i n Table Fields . Material Tables

Lists the format types available for material tables in Table Fields . Size Tables

Lists the format types available for size tables in Table Fields . Schedule Tables

Lists the format types available for schedule tables in Table Fields . DBCode Tables

Lists the format types available for database code tables in Table Fields . IndexCode Table

Lists the format types available for index codes tables in Table Fields. Thickness Tables

Lists the format types available for thickness tables in Table Fields . This table is not available in Part Numb er Format. EndType Tables

Lists the format types available for end t ype tables in Table Fields . Spec Tables

Lists the format types available for spec tables in Table Fields . This table is not available in Part Numb er Format.


87

Home Project Tab End Prep Tables

Lists the format types available for the end prep tables in the Table Fields . This format contains the END_PREP_PTN schema. Select the END_PREP_PTN schema to add the PTN value from the end preparation table to your descriptions. You must select an End Prep Table Name in the specification Properties for the end preparation part number to display correctly. Then, set the PipeDescriptionCat variable and the Appl y Pi pe En d Pr ep Rule in CADWorx Plant for the END_PREP_PTN to display in your model. For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat and Apply Pipe End Prep Rule in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. To add an end preparation table, see End Prep Table (on page 54). The DEFINED COMPTYPE in the Component Types view affects the COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL table field. Changing the value in the DEFINED COMPTYPE box changes the descriptions using COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL. The software reads the DEFINED COMPTYPE you specified for the component. The software then displa ys the new DEFINED COMPTYPE value as the description when using the COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL table field schema. For more information, see Component Types (on page 75).

Long, Short, Tag, or Part Number Format dialog box fields Table Fields

Lists the long or short description format, the tag format, or the part number format for the chosen table and enables you to add the table field to the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number Format. Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number

Lists the actual long or short description format, tag format, or part number format and enables you to add information. Use the arrows to add formats from the Table Fields box. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to Long Desc, Short Desc , Tag, or Part Number Format . If you added a space of text in the Format box, you can select the space or text and then edit it. 

Select the space or text, right-click, and then select Edit .

Format

Displays the actual appearance of the long or short description, the tag, or part num ber format. When you click in the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number box, the space or text you added appears. You can then edit the i nformation here or in the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number box. Blue words in Format are keywords. You can select keywords and then copy them. Black text is a simple text string and you can edit as needed. Example

Displays an example of the long or short description, tag, or part number, as it a ppears in the software.

Setup the Component Formats 1.

Click the ellipsis for the field to edit. The Format dialog box displays.

2.

Select the Component Tables list, and change if needed.


88

Home Project Tab 3.

Use the left or right arrows to move table boxes from one field to another. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to the corresponding format.

4.

Use the up

5.

To edit the format appearance, select the table in the Format box, and then change the format in the Format box.

6.

Click OK when finished.

7.

Click File > Save to save the changes to the project.

or down

arrows to move the format.

Add single new com ponent to a spec 1.

Double-click the specification in the Project Specs view. The specification displays in the Main Spec List View with the New Component dialog box visible.

CADWorx displays any default settings already specified in the initial set-up in the boxes. 2.

If the Edit Component pane is visible instead of the New Component pane, then right-click the spec component listing, and then sel ect Ad d . If some of the boxes are not completely visible, increase the height of the p ane.

3. Click the Group list, and then select a group. 4. Click the Type list, and then select a type. 5. Click the Data Table list, and then select a data table. When you select the Data Table, CADWorx automatically populates the EndType Data Table with the default data from the Default EndType Data Table Setup in the base catalog. You can view the information you selected b y clicking Show Data Table . The Base Catalog Data displays data tables for each component group. For more information, see Base Catalog Data (on page 72). 6. Click the Size Range list, and then select or clear the necessary sizes. 7. Click the BOM Type list, and then select a Bill of Material type or use the default BOM type. 8. Click the Layer Name list, and then select a layer, or use the default layer. 9. Click the Color Index list, and then select a color, or use the default color. 10. Click the IndexCode list, and then select an IndexCode table. 11. Select whether or not the component is an optional component, by selecting the Optional Component check box.


89

Home Project Tab 12. Select the Appl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box to apply the same end type to all ends on the component. The type of component you have selected d etermines which options are available under the EndType column. OR a. Click the Start list, and then select a starting end type. This list defaults to the Default EndType Data Table Setup for Start in the base catalog, when applicable. You can change Start to something other than the default. b. Click the Isogen Sym list, and then select an Isogen symbol for the end type. c. Click the End list, and then select an ending end type. This defaults to the Default EndType Data Table Setup for End in the base catalog, when applicable. You can change End to something other than the default. d. Click the Isogen Sym list, and then select an Isogen symbol for the end type. e. Click the Branch1 list, and then select a branch end type. This defaults to the Default EndType Data Table Setup for Branch1 in the base catalog, when applicable. You can change Branch1 to something other than the d efault. f.

Click the Isogen Sym list, and then select an Isogen symbol for the end type.

g. Click the Branch2 list, and then select a second branch end type. This defaults to the Default End Type Data Table Setu p for Branch2 in the base catalog, when applicable. You can change Branch2 to something other than the default. h. Click the Isogen Sym list, and then select an Isogen symbol for the end type. 13. Under Isogen Symbol Info rmation , the software should list default data in the Identifier and SKEY boxes. To change the Identifier and SKEY , type your identifier in the Identifier box, and then select your SKEY. 14. Click the Topworks list, and then select the topworks. 15. Click the Main list, and then select a main schedule. 16. Click the Reduction list, and then select a reduction schedule. 17. Click the Material list, and then select a material type. 18. Under the Rating section, the software lists default values from when you created the specification. Change the Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating values as needed. 19. The software lists default information for the Sort Sequence. You can change the sort sequence used for the Bill of Materials. 20. Under the Description column, the software lists a default type of the component for the Long and Short descriptions. You can change the lon g and short description format by typing new information or using the ellipsis. 21. Type Tag and Part Number information in their respective boxes. OR Select the ellipsis to change the format in the Tag Format dialog box or the Part Number Format dialog box. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86).


90

Home Project Tab 22. Type note information in the Notes box. 23. Click Add at the top right-hand side of the New component pane. 24. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project. The component adds to the list in the main window.

You can copy and place any component in the Main Spec List View in the same specification or another specification in the current project.

Branch Tab 1.

Click the Branch tab at the bottom of the New component or Edit component pane. A grid displays with Branc h Size (NPS) on top of the grid, and Main Size (NPS) on the left side of the grid.

2. To add permitted components to the grid, right-click the applicable main and branch size intersection, and then select one of the types listed. You can modify the grid. You must change the Ap pl y B ran ch Tabl e Rul e option, under Piping Rules in CADWorx Plant Setup, to Au to mat ic to apply the branch table settings . The grid box displays letters, indicating that you have added a component.

To add components to multiple intersections at the sa me time, hold down CTRL while selecting multiple intersections, or left-click a box and drag the mouse in any direction to select multiple boxes. 3. Click Save when finished. Every time you make a change, you must save the project for the change to take effect.

Add Multi Component Pane CADWorx Spec Editor Product Specs window: Double-click a product spec Adds multiple components to a specification. When adding multiple components you must define a data table for each component when finished. Component

Displays a list of components that can be added to a specification. You can se lect multiple components by selecting as many check boxes as necessary, or by using the plu s + sign to select individual components in each group. Size

Specifies the sizes for the component. Component Class

Specifies the class type specification for the component. Temperature

Specifies the maximum allowable temperature for the component. Pressure Rating

Specifies the maximum allowable pressure for the component. Optional Component

Specifies whether the component is an optional selection. Select the Optional Component check box, if you want the component to be an optional choice.


91

Home Project Tab End-Type Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s

Specifies that all selected components have the same end type. If you select the Ap pl y same end t ype on all ends check box, the software disables the other three end type options. Start

Specifies the starting point end type for the component. End

Specifies the end point end type for the c omponent. Branch1

Specifies the first branch end type for the component. T he Branch1 list is active if the Appl y same end t ype on all ends check box is not selected, and the component has three connection points. Branch2

Specifies the second branch end type for the c omponent. The Branch2 list is active when the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box is not selected, and the component has four connection points.

Schedule Main Schedule

Specifies the main schedule for the component. Branch Schedule

Specifies the branch schedule for the component.

Remaining opt ions BOM Type

Specifies the Bill of Material type for the com ponent. Tag

Specifies the tag information for the component. You can change the tag format, by clicking the Tag ellipsis which opens the Tag Format dialog box. For more information, see Component Tag Format. Notes

Specifies any notes attached to the component. Color

Specifies the color of the component in a drawing. Layer

Specifies the layer of the component.


92

Home Project Tab

Add mul tipl e new com ponents to a sp ec 1.

Double-click the specification in the Project Specs pane. The specification displays in the main window with the New com ponent dialog box visible.

2.

Right-click the component listing area of the screen, and then select Add Mul ti pl e. The Ad d m ul ti co mp on ent dialog box displays.

CADWorx displays any default settings already specified in the initial set-up in the boxes. 3. Use the Component box to select multiple components, by clicking the check boxes. 4. Click the Size type list to select or clear sizes. You might need to increase the pane height if some of the boxes are not visible. 5.

The Component Class , Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating information are set to default values. Change these values as needed.

6. Select the Optional Component check box to make this available as an optional component. 7. To apply the same end-type on all ends, select the Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e on all end s check box. The type of component you have selected d etermines which options are available under the End-Type column. OR a. Click the Start list, and then select a starting end type. b. Click the End list, and then select an ending end type. c. Click the Branch1 list, and then select a branch end type. d. Click the Branch2 list, and then select a second branch end type. 8. Click the Main Schedule list, and then select a main schedule. 9. Click the Branch Schedule list, and then select a branch schedule. 10. Click the BOM Type list, and then change the Bill of Material (BOM) type or use the default type. 11. Type tag information in the Tag box. OR Click the Tag ellipsis, use the Tag Format dialog box to set the tag format, and then click OK . For more information, see Component Tag Format. 12. Type additional information in the Notes box. 13. Click the Color list, and then change the color, or use the default color. 14. Click the Layer list, and then change the layer, or use the default layer. 15. Click Add at the top-right hand side of the Add multi component pane. 16. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project. The components are added to the list in the Main Spec List View.


93

Home Project Tab Branch Tab The Branch tab sets up the permitted specification components by main and reduction sizes, through a grid that enables you to choose which sizes use which types of components. 1.

Click the Branch tab at the bottom of the Add m ul ti co mp on ent pane. A grid displays with Branc h Size (NPS) on top of the grid, and Main Size (NPS) on the left side of the grid.

2. To add permitted components to the grid, right-click the applicable main and branch size intersection, and then select one of the types listed. The grid can be modified. You must change the Ap pl y B ran ch Tabl e Rul e option, under Piping Rules in CADWorx Plant Setup, to Au to mat ic to apply the branch table settings . The grid box displays letters, indicating that you have added a component.

To add components to multiple intersections at the sa me time hold down CTRL while either selecting multiple intersections, or left-click a box and drag the mouse in any direction to select multiple boxes. 3. Click Save when finished. Every time a change is made, the project must be saved for the change to take affect.

Edit Project Specs featur es Right-click Menu Ad d Spec if ic ati on

Enables you to add a new specification to Project Specs . For more information, see Add Specification (on page 77). Sort Specification Ascending

Sorts the specs in Project Specs in ascending order. Sort Specification Descending

Sorts the specs in Project Specs in descending order. Import Legacy Specification

Imports a legacy specification data. For more information, see Import Legacy Specification (on page 111). Import AutoPLANT Specification Data

Imports data from AutoPLANT for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Import AutoPLANT Specification Data (on page 95). Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data

Imports data from AutoCAD Plant 3D for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Dat a (on page 98). Import Specifi cation From SPRD File

Enables you to import specifications from Smart Plant Reference Data. For more information, see Import Specification From SPRD File (on page 103).


94

Home Project Tab Open



Removes the selected component from the table list. Rename

Renames the selected component. Select the component you want to rename, and then enter a new name. Collapse

Collapses the selected list. Properties

Displays the Properties view. Export Specification s To Excel

Exports an entire project to an Excel file. For more information, see Export to Excel (on page 112) and Export multiple specifications or an entire project to Excel (on page 122). Export Specificatio n To Excel

Exports data to an Excel file. For more information, see Export to Excel (on page 112). Export Specificatio n To Text

Exports data to a text document. For more information, see Export to Text (on page 122). Import Update From Excel

Imports updated data from an Excel file to a specification. For more information, see Import Update From Excel (on page 123).

Import AutoPLANT Specif ication Data Right-click on the project in the Main List View, and select Import AutoPLANT Specifi cation Data Imports data from an AutoPLANT specification. Import

Imports the AutoPLANT data. Close

Closes the Import Au toPLANT Specification Data dialog box. Help

Displays the online help.


95

Home Project Tab AutoPLANT Data File Path

Specifies the location of the AutoPLANT data. Use Spec Catalog

Uses the catalog of the AutoPLANT specification. Clearing this option enables you to select a different catalog using the Catalog ellipsis. Catalog

Displays whether or not you are using a CADWorx catalog. If this box is blank, then you selected the Use Spec Catalo g option. If you fill this box, the catalog is a CADWorx catalog. Tables

Specifies the AutoPLANT Data tables. Size Table

Specifies the size table.

CADWorx Components Program Code

Displays the program code associated with the AutoPLANT data. Short Description

Displays a short description associated with the AutoPLANT data. Size

Displays the size associated with the component for the AutoPLANT data. Double-clicking the Size box displays a list that allows you to include or exclude sizes. Schedule

Displays the schedule for the program code for the AutoPLANT component. Double-clicking the Schedule box displays a list that allows you to include or exclude schedule data. Rating

Displays the rating of the program code for the AutoPLANT component. Double-clicking the Rating box displays a list that allows you to include or exclude rating data. Select / deselect all

Include or exclude all check boxes in the CADWorx Compo nents box. Separate Catalog

Indicates whether or not the software creates a separate catalog. 

Separate Catalog path

Indicates the path of the separate catalog. The separate catalog path displays when you select the Separate Catalog check box. To change the name of the catalog or to save in a different location, click the ellipsis.


96

Home Project Tab Import a spec using an AutoPLANT catalog 1.

Right-click the project in the Main List View, and select Import AutoPLANT Specification Data. The Import Au toPLANT Specification Data dialog box displays.

2.

Click the File Path ellipsis under Auto PLA NT Data. The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select the AutoPLANT data for import, and click Open . 4. Select Use Spec Catalog to use the AutoPLANT catalog. 5. Select a table from the Tables list. 6. Select the check box of the required Program Code.





You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select al l the program codes under CADWorx Compon ents . You can also change the Size, Schedule, or Rating by double clicking the boxes under each heading.

7. Click Import. 8. Click OK. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View Log File. Imports the AutoPLANT data.

Import a spec using a CADWorx catalog 1.

Right-click the project in the Main List View, and select Import AutoPLANT Specification Data. The Import Au toPLANT Specification Data dialog box displays.

2.

Click the File Path ellipsis under Auto PLA NT Data . The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select the AutoPLANT data for import, and click Open . 4. Clear the Use Spec Catalog option to use a CADWorx catalog. This defaults to the catalog you selected as the base c atalog when creating the project. To change the ca talog, do the following: a. Click the Catalog ellipsis. The Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays.

b. Select a CADWorx catalog and then click Open . The CADWorx catalog populates the Catalog box.

5. Select a table from the Tables list. 6. Select a size table from the Size Table list.


97

Home Project Tab 7.

Select the check box of the required Program Code.





You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the program codes under CADWorx Components . You can also change the Size, Schedule, or Rating by double clicking the boxes under each heading.

8.

Click Import.

9.

Click OK. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View Log File. Imports the AutoPLANT data.

Import Auto CAD Plant 3D Specification Data Right-click the project in the Main List View, and select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specifi cation Data Imports data from an AutoCAD Plant 3D s pecification. Import

Imports the AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Close

Closes the Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data dialog box. Help

Displays the help.

AutoCAD Plant 3D Data Size Table

Specifies a size table when you use a CADWorx catalog for import. View Detail

Displays the PLANT 3D Size Table Detail dialog box. You can only click View Detail after you select an AutoCAD Plant 3D specification. For more information, see PLANT 3D Size Table Detail Dialog Box (on page 100). Target Unit

Specifies the units of the target project. Target Unit is only available when you select the Use Spec Catalog option. Source Unit

Specifies the units in the Plant 3D c atalog that are used for import. The Source Unit list is only available when you select Use Spec Catalog and set Target Unit to Metric/Inch units. In this case, you have the option to choose between importing either English/Inch components or Metric/Inch components. In all other instances, the Source Unit list is unavailable because the Source Unit must reflect the Target Unit . When you select English/Inch or Metric/Metric units for the Target Unit , the Source Unit automatically selects the English/Inch or Metric/Metric units, respectively.


98

Home Project Tab Usershape Block Unit

Specifies the units for the user shape block from the AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Use Spec Catalog

Specifies when the import uses the spec of the AutoCAD Plant 3D data. Combine Catalog

Creates a combined default catalog for the imported specifications. Combine Catalog is only available when you sel ect two or more specifications in Plant 3D List Files . Catalog

Specifies a CADWorx catalog when you do not select the Use Spec Catalog option. Plant 3D List Files

Displays the Open dialog box and enables you to select one or more AutoCAD Plant 3D specifications. Specification List

Lists the specifications that you selected from the Open dialog box.

CADWorx Components Component Type

Displays a list of the components in t he AutoCAD Plant data. Long Description

Displays a long description associated with the AutoCAD Plant data. Select / deselect all

Includes and excludes all check boxes in the CADWorx Compo nents box. Separate Catalog


Separate Catalog path

Indicates the path of the separate catalog. The separate catalog path displays when you select the Separate Catalog check box. To change the name of the catalog or to save in a different location, click the ellipsis.

Right-click Menu Check group

Enables you to check a com ponent group under Component Type without expanding the group. Uncheck group

Enables you to clear a component group under Component Type without expanding the group. Expand all grou ps

Enables you to expand all the groups without having to select the plus sign. Collapse all gro ups

Enables you to collapse all the groups without having to select the plus sign.


99

Home Project Tab

PLANT 3D Size Table Detail Dialog Box Click View Details Enables you to check the size table for the Plant 3D catalog when using the Use Spec Catalog option and to change the outside diameter (OD). Displays the name of the P3D catalog. This is dynamic, so it is always the name of the size table you have selected in the Size Table list. NOM - Nominal Size

Displays the nominal sizes in the Plant 3D size table from the catalog attached to the Plant 3D specification that you selected in the File Path . This cannot be changed. OD - Outside Diameter

Displays the outside diameter of the nominal size in the Plant 3D si ze table from the catalog attached to the Plant 3D specification you selected i n the File Path. To change the outside diameter, follow the steps below. 1. Click View Details . 2. Click the OD box of the number you want to change. 3. Type the new information. 4. Click Appl y to keep the change and make more changes. OR This only happens if you click OK without clicking Appl y . Click OK to accept the changes. The "Do you want to save the changes to (table name)?" message box displays.



Click Yes to save the changes, No to discard the changes, or Cancel to return to the PLANT 3D Size Table Detail dialog box.

You are returned to the Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data dialog box.

To finish your work, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data (on page 98).

Import a singl e specifi cation us ing an AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog 1.

Right-click the project in the Main List View, and then select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specifi cation Data. The Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specificatio n Data dialog box displays.

2.

Select the Use Spec Catalog option to use the AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog. This is the default option.


100

Home Project Tab 3.

4.

Select the units from the Target Unit list. The software automatically selects the Source Unit, and the Source Unit list becomes unavailable. The software populates CADWorx Compo nents only when there are components available in the AutoCAD Plant 3D specification for the units you selected. The unit you select must be the same as the units in your chosen specification. If no com ponents match the unit, the CADWorx Compo nents box remains empty. Click the Plant 3D List Files ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.

5. Select the AutoCAD Plant 3D data for import, and then click Open . 6. Select the Size Table for import. If no size table is available, the Target Unit does not match the specification. You can click View Detail to view the sizes in the size table and change the outside diameter (OD). For more information, see PLANT 3D Size Table Detail Dialog Box (on page 100). 7. Click the plus sign to expand the Component Type list, and then click the check box next to the component that you want to add. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select al l the components under CADWorx Components . If you want a separate catalog, select the Separate Catalog check box. Click the Separate Catalog file location ellipsis to select a different catalog. 8. Click Import. 9. Click OK. You can click View Log File to view the details of the conversion. The AutoCAD Plant 3D specification imports.

Import a singl e specifi cation us ing a CADWorx catalog 1.

Right-click the project in the Main List View, and then select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specifi cation Data. The Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specificatio n Data dialog box displays.

2. Clear the Use Spec Catalo g option to use a CADWorx catalog. The Catalog box defaults to the base catalog that you selected when you first created the project. If you did no t select a base catalog, then you must select one now. To select a catalog, do the following: a. Click the Catalog ellipsis. The Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays.

b. Select a CADWorx catalog, and then click Open . The CADWorx catalog populates the Catalog box.

The catalog you select must have the same units as the AutoCAD Plant 3D specification, or no components become available for import. 3. Click the Plant 3D List Files ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays. 4. Select the AutoCAD Plant 3D data for import, and then click Open .


101

Home Project Tab 5.

6.

7. 8.

Select a size table from the Size Table list. The software auto-populates the Size Table list from the base catalog. If only one si ze table exists in your catalog, you cannot select another size table. Click the plus sign to expand the Component Type list, and then select the check box for the component that you want to add. Repeat this step for each component that you want to add. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the components under CADWorx Compo nents . Click Import. Click OK. Click View L og File to view the details of the conversion. The AutoCAD Plant 3D specification imports.

Import mul tipl e specifi cations us ing a CADWorx catalog 1.

2.

Right-click the project in the Main List View, and then select Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specifi cation Data. The Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specificatio n Data dialog box displays. Clear the Use Spec Catalo g option to use a CADWorx catalog. The Catalog box defaults to the base catalog that you selected when you first created the project. If you did no t select a base catalog, then you must select one now. To select a catalog, do the following: a. Click the Catalog ellipsis. The Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays. b. Select a CADWorx catalog, and then click Open . The CADWorx catalog populates the Catalog box. The catalog you select must have the same units as the AutoCAD Plant 3D specification, or no components become available for import.

3. Click the Plant 3D List Files ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.

4. Select the AutoCAD Plant 3D data for import, and then click Open . If you want to combine the catalogs of the selected specifications, select the Combine Catalog check box. You can only combine catalogs if you select more than one specification. 5. Select a size table from the Size Table list. The software auto-populates the Size Table list from the base catalog. If only one size table exists in your catalog, you cannot select another size table. 6. Click the plus sign to expand the Component Type list, and then select the check box for the component that you want to add. Repeat this step for each component that you want to add. You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select all the components under CADWorx Components . 7. Click Import. 8. Click OK. You can click View Log File to view the details of the conversion. The AutoCAD Plant 3D specification imports.


102

Home Project Tab

Import Specif ication From SPRD File Right-click on the project in the Main List View, and select Import Specification From SPRD File Imports data from a Smart Plant Reference Data file by creating a catalog and specification in the import. Units

Specifies the units for the import. When you select the SPRD file for import and it contains the unit information, the software automatically selects the units and disables the list. 

English/Inch

Uses the imperial system with nominal inch input. 

Metric/Inch

Uses the metric system with nominal inch input. 

Metric/Metric 

Uses the metric system with metric input.

List Items Type Name

Lists the type of information for the Smart Plant Reference Data import. Item Name

Lists the item name of the Smart Plant Reference Data being imported, such as the component or the specification. Parent Name

Indicates whether the Smart Plant Reference Data information is created for the catalog or the specification. The catalog and specification i nformation are created in the Import Specifi cation From SPRD File dialog box. Status

Specifies the status of the Smart Plant Reference Data information. 

Pending

Indicates the item in the list has not been selected or i mported. 

Selected

Indicates the item in the list has been selected and is awaiting importation. 

Successful

Indicates the item in the list has been successfully imported. 

Failed

Indicates the item in the list has not been converted and has not imported. Select / deselect all

Include or exclude all check boxes in the List Items box.


103

Home Project Tab Separate Catalog


Catalog Path

Indicates the path of the separate catalog. The Catalog Path displays when you select the Separate Catalo g check box. To change the name of the SPRD catalog or to save in a different location, select the Catalog Path ellipsis. File Path

Specifies the file path to the original file. Select File

Enables you to select the Smart Plant Reference Data files for the im port. Import

Imports the Smart Plant Reference Data information. Close

Closes the Import Specifi cation From SPRD File dialog box. Help

Displays the online help. 1. Right-click the project in the Main List View, and select Import Specific ation From SPRD File. The Import Specification From SPRD File dialog box displays.

2. Click Select File. The Open dialog box displays.

3. Select the Smart Plant Reference Data file for import, and then click Open . If the SPRD file contains the units, then the software automatically selects the correct units from the Units list and disables the Units list. If the SPRD file does not con tain the units, then you must select the units from the Units list. 4. Select the check boxes to import.







You can use the Select / deselect all check box to select al l the program codes under CADWorx Compon ents . Select the Separate Catalo g check box to create a s eparate catalog. To change the name of the SPRD catalog or to save in a different location, select the Catalog Path ellipsis.

5. Click Import. You can view a log file of the details for the conversion by clicking View log file. 6. Click Close. The software imports the Smart Plant Reference Data file specification.


104

Home Project Tab If the Do you want to upd ate project f rom base catalog? message displays, do the following: 1.

Click Yes. The Review Update message box displays.

2.

Click Yes or Review Update. If you click Review Update, see Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 109) for more information. The project updates from the base catalog.

After import, check the data against the original SPRD file. For the SP1 release of CADWorx 2015, the software places the Ident , Short , and Option codes in the specification. 



The software places the Ident Code in the DBCodes Tables under the IDENT_CODE column and joins the IndexCode table with the DBCode table. The software creates custom data fields for the Short Code and the Option Code under the Custom Data properties for that specification and component.

Pipe Supp ort Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Project: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t Enables you to add new pipe support libraries and import legacy pipe support assemblies to a project or a libraries file. For more information, see Pipe Support Library (on page 128). Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t L ib rar y - Adds a pipe support libraries file to a project or a libraries file. For more information, see Add Pipe Support Library (on page 105). Import Legacy Pipe Support Lib rary - Enables you to import legacy pipe support libraries. For more information, see Import Legacy Pipe Support Library (on page 107).

Add Pipe Su pp or t Library CADWorx Spec Editor Project: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t > Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t Li br ary

CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Right-click the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t Li br ary CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t > Ad d Pip e Support Library

CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Rightclick the library file in the Pipe Support Library pane > Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t L ib rar y Adds a pipe support library to a project or a library file. For pipe supports to work correctly, you must have a PipeSupport category in the data table of the catalog with all components. Name

Specifies the name of the pipe support l ibrary.


105

Home Project Tab Catalog

Specifies the base catalog. Size Table

Specifies the size table from the base catalog f or use with the pipe support data. Av ail abl e Size

Specifies a list of the available sizes from the size table. Select or clear the check boxes in the list to add or remove sizes. Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long description attached to the pipe support components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the pip e support components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the pipe support components. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the pipe support components. For more on the Format Setups , see Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 157). Created By

Specifies who created the pipe support library. Description

Specifies the description of the pipe support l ibrary. 1. Click the Home tab, and then click Add Pip e Sup po rt Li br ary in the Pipe Suppor t panel. Alternatively, right-click the project or the library file, a nd then select Add Pip e Support Library. The New Pipe Support Li brary dialog box displays.

2. Type the name of the new library in the Name box. 3.

Use the default catalog, or click the Catalog ellipsis for a new catalog. When the Select Company Catalog File dialog box displays, select a catalog, and then click Open . This catalog must contain a PipeSupport category for the pipe supports to function correctly. To add a pipe support category, see Legacy Catalog Data Panel (on page 56) or to build your own, see Category Table (on page 46).

4. Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table. The size table you select c omes from the catalog that you selected in the last step. If this catalog does not contain a size table, you need to add one before you can add the new pipe support library. 5. Use the Av ail abl e Size list to select or clear sizes. 6. Click Long Desc Format , and then complete the dialog box as needed.


106

Home Project Tab 7.

Click Part Number Format , and then complete the dialog box as needed.

8.

Click Short Desc Format , and then complete the dialog box as needed.

9.

Click Tag Format , and then complete the dialog box as needed. Click OK in each dialog box when finished. For more information on the format dialog boxes, see Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 157).

10. Type the person or company that created the library in the Created By box. 11. Type a description of the library in the Description box. 12. Click OK . 13. Click File > Save to save the changes to the project. The new pipe support assembly displays under the project name in Pipe Support Library.

See Also Pipe Support Library (on page 128) Pipe Support Library File Home Tab (on page 155)

Impor t Legacy Pipe Support Li brary CADWorx Spec Editor Project: Home Tab > Pipe Suppor t > Import L egacy Pipe Suppor t Library

CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Right-click the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > Import Pipe Support Library CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: Home Tab > Pipe Support > Import Legacy Pipe Support Lib rary

CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Rightclick the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > I mport Pipe Support Library Enables you to import legacy pipe support libraries into the project or library file. As sem bl y Fi le

Specifies the legacy file to im port the pipe supports. Catalog

Specifies the base catalog to reference the pipe supp ort information. This catalog must contain a PipeSupport category for the pipe supports to function correctly. To add a pipe support category, see Legacy Catalog Data Panel (on page 56) or to build your own, see Category Table (on page 46). Size Table

Specifies the size table from the base catalog that contains the pipe support size information. Import

Imports the pipe support to the project or l ibraries file for use in the drawing. For more information on using the new pipe support in the drawing, see CADWorx Support Modeler in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide.


107

Home Project Tab

1.

Click the Home tab, and then click I mport L egacy Pipe Suppor t Library Pipe Suppor t panel.

on the

The Import Pipe Support Library dialog box displays.

2.

Click the As sem bl y Fi le ellipsis. The Open dialog box displays.

3.

Select the pipe support specification for import, and then click Open . The CADWorx Spec folder contains the Legacy pipe supports for 2013 and prior versions.

4.

Check the Catalog and Size Table, and change if needed. If you want to use a dif ferent catalog, click the Catalog ellipsis, and then select a new catalog. Make sure that this catalog has a PipeSupport category for the pipe supports to function correctly.

5.

Click Import . The pipe supports add to the Pipe Support Library pane under the project or libraries file.

Catalog Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Catalog Enables you to update the project from a catalog and review the tables for update. Update From Catalog - Updates the project from the base catalog. For more information, see Update From Catalog (on page 108). Review Table Li nks - Enables you to review and edit the table links for the catalog update. For more information, see Review Table Links (on page 109).

Update From Catalog CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Catalog > Update From Catalog Updates the spec project from the base catalog. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Update From Catalog

on the Catalog panel.

The CADWorx Spec Editor dialog box displays, asking if you would like to update from the base catalog.

2.

Click Yes, No, or Review Update.

3.

If you click Review Update, see Review Update (on page 109) & Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 109) to continue. The project updates from the base catalog.


108

Home Project Tab

Review Update CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Catalog > Update From Catalog

> Review Update

Enables you to check and change the details of the spec project that you want to update from the base catalog. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Update From Catalog


OR Open a project that has had its b ase catalog updated. The CADWorx Spec Editor dialog box displays, asking if you would like to update from the base catalog.

2.

Click Review Update. The Review Table lin ks dialog box displays.

For more information, see Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 109).

Review Table Links CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Catalog > Review Table Links Displays the Review Table Link s dialog box enabling you to review the links for update and change the Sourc e Table Name and the Source ID as needed. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Review Table Lin ks


The Review Table Link s dialog box displays.

2.

See Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 109) to continue.

Review Table Link s Dialog Box Enables you to check the data IDs and other information pertaining to a Catalog or Project and change the Source ID and/or Source Table as needed. Specification

Displays the specifications in the project that you can select to update from a catalog to that specification. This options is only visible when working in a project. Show All Tables

Displays all the tables associated with the project you open. Show Mis-Matched Tables

Displays only the mis-matched tables associated with the project you open. Show Tables With Updates

Displays only the tables with up dates from the catalog for the project you open. Table Type


109

Home Project Tab Displays the type of tables in the catalog. Use anyone of the three options above to receive only those types of tables. Destination Table Name

Displays the destination table for the catalog to be updated from. Sourc e Table Name

Displays the name of the source table in the catalog where the information being updated is coming from. If this is listed incorrectly, click the Source Table Name box under the heading and a list appears. Select the correct source table. Destination Base ID

Specifies the ID for the destination table. Source ID

Specifies the ID for the source table. The Source ID box is editable. Destination Table Date

Displays the date of the destination table. Sourc e Table Date

Displays the date of the source table. OK

Accepts the settings and updates from the catalog, and closes the Review Table Links dialog box. Cancel

Cancels the update. Ap pl y

Saves changes from the catalog for the item selected in the Specification list. Ap pl y Al l

Saves changes from the catalog for all item s in the Specification list. Force Update

Updates the item selected in the Specification list. Force Update All

Updates all items in the Specification list. Help

Displays the CADWorx help file. 

Change the Sourc e Table Name and Source IDs as needed, and then click OK to update. Alternatively, you can click Force Update or Force Update All .

To view the Review Table Link s dialog box in a catalog, your catalog must use a base catalog and the catalog must contain data. You can access this option by rig ht-clicking the catalog and selecting Review Table Lin ks .


110

Home Project Tab

Legacy Specification Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Specificatio n Enables you to import specs from earlier versions of CADWorx. Import Legacy Specification - Imports specifications from an earlier version of CADWorx. For more information, see Import Legacy Specification (on page 111).

Impor t Legacy Specific ation CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Legacy Specificatio n > Import Legacy Specification

Imports specifications from an earlier version of CADWorx. Specification

Specifies the specification folder for import. Catalog

Specifies the base catalog for the import. Size Table

Specifies the size table for the import. 1.

Click the Home tab, and then click Import Legacy Specification Specification panel.

on the Legacy

The Import Legacy Specification (.spc) dialog box displays.

2.

Click the Specification ellipsis.

3.

Navigate to the folder and specification file for import, and then select it.

4.

Click Open . The Specification and Catalog boxes are populated.

5.

To change the Catalog box, click the Catalog ellipsis. You must have a catalog already set up, with the data for the specification already imported into it.

6.

Click the Size Table list, and then select a size table.

7. Click Import . 8. 9.

The Converted successfully dialog box appears. Click OK . Click File > Save to save the changes to the project.


111

Home Project Tab

Export/Impor t Data Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home Project tab: Export Data Export to Excel - Exports the selected specification to an Excel file. For more information, see Export to Excel (on page 112). Export to Text - Exports the selected specification to a text file. For more information, see Export to Text (on page 122). Import Update From Excel - Imports a specification from an Excel file. For more information, see Import Update From Excel (on page 123).

Export to Excel CADWorx Spec Editor Home Project tab: Export/Import Data > Export to Excel Exports data from the selected specification to an Excel file. The Specification Editor exports specifications using Excel named cells, allowing you to create or use your own Excel specification templates. You can control data contents and placement by location of the supported cell names or by the inclusion or exclusion of the cell names. For more information on supported cell names, see Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 113), and Cell Name Reference - Component Properties (on page 116). The Specification Editor restricts imports to target a specification originating from an exp ort. The updated Excel interface capabilities include: Control over format of export template through Excel named fields. Control over content of export through removal of unwanted fields from the export template. Ability to export basic component listing with one component record per size range. Ability to export detailed component listing with one component record per unique size. Ability to make updates to specification properties and component properties in the Excel export and import the updates back into the originating spec. Ability to review data changes on import and include or exclude specific data updates from the import.     



Export Specification to Excel Dialog Box Enables you to export an Excel file with a template. Template path

Specifies the template you want to use for the Excel export.


Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 113)



Cell Name Reference - Component Properties (on page 116)



Export multiple specifications or an entire project to Excel (on page 122)



Export a single specification to Excel (on page 122)


112

Home Project Tab

Cell Name Reference - Specifi cation Properties The table below lists available Specification Properties . You can export these single-value specification properties to an Excel file. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Specification Property indicates the same Excel cell name used to export each associated Specification Property . An X in the Export and Import columns designates the available properties for export and import. If you include any of the listed Specification Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Specification Property value. For example, if you include the Specifi cation ID in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Specification ID in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the position of the exported Specification Property value. If you exclude any of the listed Specifi cation Prop erty Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Specification Property value from the export. For example, if you do not i nclude the Specification ID in the Excel template that you create, then the Specification ID does not export to the Excel fi le. Specifi cation Property

Cell Name

Export

Import

Specifi cation ID

SPEC_GUID

X

-

Specifi cation Name

SPEC_NAME

X

X

Catalog Name

SPEC_CAT_NAME

X

-

Catalog Path

SPEC_CAT_PATH

X

-

Specification Units

SPEC_UNIT

X

-

Size Table Name

SPEC_SIZE_TBL

X

-

DBCode Table Name

SPEC_DBCODE_TBL

X

X

Thickness Table Name

SPEC_THK_TBL

X

X

Material Table Name

SPEC_MAT_TBL

X

X

Bolt Diameter Table Name

SPEC_BOLT_DIA_TBL

X

X

Bolt Length Table Name

SPEC_BOLT_LEN_TBL

X

X

End Prep Table Name

SPEC_ENDPREP_TBL

X

X

Weight Factor

SPEC_WEIGHT_FACTOR

X

X

Component Class

SPEC_COMPONENT_CLASS X

X

Temperature Rating

SPEC_TEMPERATURE_RATI X NG

X

Pressure Rating

SPEC_PRESSURE_RATING

X

X

Spec Level Layer Name

SPEC_LAYER_NAME

X

X

Au to CAD Co lo r In dex

SPEC_COLOR_INDEX

X

X

Lim it Spec Size Range To

SPEC_SIZE_RANGE

X

X


113

Home Project Tab Default Flange Type

SPEC_DEFAULT_FLANGE

X

X

Reducin g Component Selection

SPEC_REDUCING_SELECTI ON

X

X

Version

SPEC_VERSION

X

-

Created By

SPEC_CREATED_BY

X

X

Edited By

SPEC_EDITED_BY

X

X

Spec Descriptio n

SPEC_DESCRIPTION

X

X

Default OTAP SKEY

SPEC_DEFAULT_OTAP_SKE X Y

X

Export Date

EXPORT_DATE

-

X

The following table lists available Specification Schedule Properties . A specification schedule setup displays a range of schedule values with one value for each pipe size. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Specification Schedule Property indicates the Excel cell name used to export each associated Specification Schedule Property . An X in the Export and Import columns designates the available properties for export and import. If you include any of the listed Specification Schedule Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Specification Schedule Property value. For example, if you include the Schedule Size in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Schedule Size in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the top row of the exported Specification Schedule range. Subsequent rows in the exported Specification Schedule range insert directly below the top row. If you exclude any of the listed Specification Schedule Property Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Specification Schedule Property value from the export. For example, if you do not include the Schedule Size in the Excel template that you create, then the Schedule Size does not export to the Excel file. Specifi cation Schedule Property

Cell Name

Export

Import

Schedule Size

SCH_SIZE

X

-

Schedule Value

SCH_VALUE

X

X

The following table lists available Specification Custom Field Properti es. A specification custom field setup displays a range-type setup with each custom field value listed for each specification custom field. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Specification Custom Field Property indicates the Excel cell name used to export each associated Specification Custom Field Property. An X in the Export and Import columns designates the available properties for export and import. If you include any of the listed Specification Cust om Field Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Specification Custom Field Property value. For example, if you include the Title in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Title in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the top row of the exported Specifi cation Custom Field range. Subsequent rows in the exported Specification Custom Field range insert directly below the top row.


114

Home Project Tab If you exclude any of the listed Specification Custo m Field Property Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Specification Custom Field Property Cell Names value from the export. For exam ple, if you do not include the Title in the Excel template that you create, then the Title does not export to the Excel file. Specifi cation Custom Field Property

Cell Name

Export

Import

Name

FIELD_NAME

X

-

Title

FIELD_TITLE

X

X

Description

FIELD_DESCRIPTION

X

X

Data Type

FIELD_DATA_TYPE

X

-

Required Input

FIELD_REQUIRED_INPUT

X

X

Default

FIELD_DEFAULT_VALUE

X

X

At tac h t o Co mp on ent

FIELD_ATTACH

X

X

The following table lists available Specification Br anch Table Properti es. A specification branch table setup displays a table-type setup listing Main by Reduction size values. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Specification Br anch Table Property indicates the Excel cell name used to export each associated Specifi cation Branch Table Property . An X in the Export and Import columns designates the available properties for export and import. If you include any of the listed Specification Branch Table Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Specification Branch Table Property value. For example, if you include the Branch Table in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Branch Table in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the BRANCH_TABLE Cell in the Excel template represents the top-left intersection of the Main Size and Branch Size headers for the exported Specification Branch Table. All Branch Table values populate consistent with the Branch Table setup in the Specification Editor respective to this Cell Name header intersection location. The location of the BRANCH_LEGEND Cell in the Excel template represents the top row of the exported Specification B ranch Table Legend . Subsequent rows in the exported Specification Branch Table Legend insert directly below the top row. If you exclude any of the listed Specification Branch Table Property Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Specification B ranch Table Property Cell Names value from the export. For example, if you do not include the Branch Table in the Excel template that you create, then the Branch Table does not export to the Excel file. Specifi cation Branch Table Property

Cell Name

Export

Import

Branch Table

BRANCH_TABLE

X

X

Branch Table Legend

BRANCH_LEGEND

X

-


115

Home Project Tab

Cell Name Reference - Compon ent Properties You can list component properties in a basic format, a detailed format, or both. Under the Basic Listing Format , component data exports much the same way it lists in the Specification Editor's Component list . A single record exports for each component item in the specification, representing the full size range for that component as listed in the specification. When you import updates from the Excel specification details into the same target specification using Import Update From Excel in the Specification Editor, the updates made to the items in the Basic Listing Format import only the updated data.

Basic Listing Format The following table lists available Component Properties with the associated Cell Name references for the Basic Listing Format export. You can export these single-value component properties to an Excel file. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Component Property indicates the same Excel cell name used to export each associated Component Property using the Basic Listing Format . An X in the Export and Import columns designates the available properties for export and import. If you include any of the listed Component Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Component Property value. For example, if you include the Component ID in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Component ID in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the position of the exported Component Property value. If you exclude any of the l isted Component Property Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Component Property value from export. For example, if you do not include the Component ID in the Excel template that you create, then the Component ID does not export to the Excel file. Component Property

Cell Name – Basic Listi ng Format

Export

Import

Component ID

COMP_ID

X

-

Component Group Single

COMP_GROUP_GRP

X

-

Component Group Repeat

COMP_GROUP_RPT

X

-

Type

COMP_TYPE

X

-

Data Table

COMP_DATA_TBL

X

-

Size Range

COMP_SIZE_RANGE

X

X

BOM Type

COMP_BOM

X

X

Layer Name

COMP_LAYER_NAME

X

X


116

Home Project Tab Color Index

COMP_COLOR_INDEX

X

X

IndexCode

COMP_INDEXCODE

X

X

Optional Component

COMP_OPTIONAL

X

X

Start End Type

COMP_START_END_TYPE

X

X

Start Isogen Symbol

COMP_START_ISOGEN_SYM

X

X

Start Component Class COMP_START_COMPONENT_CLASS

X

X

Start Temperature Rating

COMP_START_TEMPERATURE_RATIN G

X

X

Start Pressure Rating

COMP_START_PRESSURE_RATING

X

X

End End Type

COMP_END_END_TYPE

X

X

End Isogen Symbol

COMP_END_ISOGEN_SYM

X

X

End Component Class

COMP_END_COMPONENT_CLASS

X

X

End Temperature Rating

COMP_END_TEMPERATURE_RATING

X

X

End Pressure Rating

COMP_END_PRESSURE_RATING

X

X

Branch1 End Type

COMP_BRANCH1_END_TYPE

X

X

Branch1 Isogen Symbol

COMP_BRANCH1_ISOGEN_SYM

X

X

Branch1 Component Class

COMP_BRANCH1_COMPONENT_CLAS S

X

X

Branch1 Temperature Rating

COMP_BRANCH1_TEMPERATURE_RAT ING

X

X

Branch1 Pressure Rating

COMP_BRANCH1_PRESSURE_RATING

X

X

Branch2 End Type

COMP_BRANCH2_END_TYPE

X

X


COMP_BRANCH2_ISOGEN_SYM

X

X


COMP_BRANCH2_COMPONENT_CLAS S

X

X


117

Home Project Tab Branch2 Temperature Rating

COMP_BRANCH2_TEMPERATURE_RAT ING


COMP_BRANCH2_PRESSURE_RATING

Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e

COMP_SAME_ENDTYPE

Ap pl y s ame r ati ng to all ends

COMP_SAME_RATING

Isogen Identifier

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

COMP_ISOGEN_IDENTIFIER

X

X

Isogen SKEY

COMP_ISOGEN_SKEY

X

X

Topworks Data Table

COMP_TOPWORK_TBL

X

X

Main Schedule

COMP_MAIN_SCH

X

X

Reducti on Schedule

COMP_RED_SCH

X

X

Material

COMP_MAT

X

X

Sort Sequence

COMP_SORT_SEQUENCE

X

X

Long Description

COMP_LONG_DESC

X

X

Short Description

COMP_SHORT_DESC

X

X

Tag

COMP_TAG

X

X

Part Number

COMP_PART_NUMBER

X

X

Notes

COMP_NOTES

X

X

Custom Field ‘ABC’

COMP_FIELD_ABC

X

-

The values for component properties listed under the Basic Listing Format column export with the property settings assigned to each component in the Specification Editor. The Long Description , Short Description , Part Number , and Tag schemas export as their respective schema strings. The Use Specification Schedule, Use Specification Material, and other component setting options export as Use Specificatio n Schedule, Use Specification Material , and so on.


118

Home Project Tab Detailed Listing Format Under the Detailed List ing Format , component data exports by component item size. A single record exports for each component item size available across the specification components. When you import updates from the Excel specification into the target specification using Import From Excel Update in the Specification Editor, only u pdates made to the Component Basic Listing import. Any updates you make to the Detailed Listi ng Formats do not import, because the Component Properties are managed at the component item level specification not at the component item size level. The following table lists available Component Properties with associated Cell Name references for Detailed Listi ng Format export. The Detailed List ing Format Cell Names are identical to the Basic Listing Format Cell Names , with the exception of a _D suffix attached to the Detailed Listi ng Format . You can export these single-value com ponent properties to an Excel export. The Cell Name reference listed beside each Component Property indicates the Excel cell name used to export each associated Component Property using the Detailed Listing Format . An X in the Export column designates the properties available for export. You cannot import detailed listed format items. If you include any of the listed Component Property Cell Names in the selected Excel template, then those names populate with the associated Component Property value. For example, if you include the Type in the Excel template that you create, then the value of the Type in the Specification Editor exports to the Excel file. The location of the Cell Name in the Excel template represents the position of the exported Component Property value. If you exclude any of the l isted Component Property Cell Names from the selected Excel template, then those names remove the associated Component Property value from export. For example, if you do not include the Type in the Excel template that you create, then the Type does not export to the Excel file. Component Property Cell Name – Detailed Listi ng Format

Export

Import

Component Group Single

COMP_GROUP_GRP_D

X

-

Component Group Repeat

COMP_GROUP_RPT_D

X

-

Type

COMP_TYPE_D

X

-

Data Table

COMP_DATA_TBL_D

X

-

Size Range

COMP_SIZE_EACH

X

-

BOM Type

COMP_BOM_D

X

-

Layer Name

COMP_LAYER_NAME_D

X

-

Color Index

COMP_COLOR_INDEX_D

X

-

IndexCode

COMP_INDEXCODE_D

X

-


119

Home Project Tab Optional Component

COMP_OPTIONAL_D

X

-

Start End Type

COMP_START_END_TYPE_D

X

-

Start Isogen Symbol

COMP_START_ISOGEN_SYM_D

X

-

Start Component Class

COMP_START_COMPONENT_CLASS_D

X

-

Start Temperature Rating

COMP_START_TEMPERATURE_RATING_ D

X

-

Start Pressure Rating

COMP_START_PRESSURE_RATING_D

X

-

End End Type

COMP_END_END_TYPE_D

X

-

End Isogen Symbol

COMP_END_ISOGEN_SYM_D

X

-

End Component Class

COMP_END_COMPONENT_CLASS_D

X

-

End Temperature Rating

COMP_END_TEMPERATURE_RATING_D

X

-

End Pressure Rating

COMP_END_PRESSURE_RATING_D

X

-

Branch1 End Type

COMP_BRANCH1_END_TYPE_D

X

-


COMP_BRANCH1_ISOGEN_SYM_D

X

-


COMP_BRANCH1_COMPONENT_CLASS_ D

X

-

Branch1 Temperature Rating

COMP_BRANCH1_TEMPERATURE_RATIN X G_D

-


COMP_BRANCH1_PRESSURE_RATING_D

Branch2 End Type

COMP_BRANCH2_END_TYPE_D


COMP_BRANCH2_ISOGEN_SYM_D


COMP_BRANCH2_COMPONENT_CLASS_ D


X

-

X

-

X

-

X

-

120

Home Project Tab Branch2 Temperature Rating

COMP_BRANCH2_TEMPERATURE_RATIN X G_D


COMP_BRANCH2_PRESSURE_RATING_D

-

X

-

Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e COMP_SAME_ENDTYPE_D

X

-

Ap pl y s ame r ati ng to all ends

COMP_SAME_RATING_D

X

-

Isogen Identifier

COMP_ISOGEN_IDENTIFIER_D

X

-

Isogen SKEY

COMP_ISOGEN_SKEY_D

X

-

Topworks Data Table COMP_TOPWORK_TBL_D

X

-

Main Schedule

COMP_MAIN_SCH_D

X

-

Reducti on Schedule

COMP_RED_SCH_D

X

-

Material

COMP_MAT_D

X

-

Sort Sequence

COMP_SORT_SEQUENCE_D

X

-

Long Description

COMP_LONG_DESC_D

X

-

Short Description

COMP_SHORT_DESC_D

X

-

Tag

COMP_TAG_D

X

-

Part Number

COMP_PART_NUMBER_D

X

-

Notes

COMP_NOTES_D

X

-

Custom Field ‘ABC’

COMP_FIELD_ABC_D

X

-

Under the Detailed Listi ng Format column, the values f or the component properties list the actual values assigned to each com ponent's size when placed in the m odel. The Long Description , Short Description , Part Number , and Tag schemas translate into the actual descriptions, part numbers, and tags assigned to each component size when placed in the model. The Use Specificatio n Schedule , Use Specifi cation Material , and other component setting options translate into the actual Schedule, Material, and other values assigned to each component size when placed in the m odel.


121

Home Project Tab

Export mult iple specifications or an entir e project to Excel 1.

Open a project file, and then select the project under Project Specs .

2.

On the Home tab, click Export to Excel on the Export/Import Data panel. Alternatively, right-click, and then select Export Specificatio ns To Excel. The Export Specification s to Excel dialog box displays.

3.

Select a template from the Template list, or click Browse to find another template.

4.

Click Export .

5.

Select a location where you want to save the file, and then click OK . The files save to the selected folder.

To view the file, open it in Excel from Windows Explorer . You can now make changes to the exported Excel files , and then import those changes into the Specification Editor. For more information on importing specifications to the Specification Editor, see Import Update From Excel (on page 123), Import data from Excel to a specification (on page 124), Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 113), and Cell Name Reference - Component Properties (on page 116).

Export a single specific ation to Excel 1.

Open a project file, and then select a specification.

2.

On the Home tab, click Export to Excel on the Export/Import Data panel. Alternatively, right-click, and then select Export Specific ation To Excel. The Export Specification to Excel dialog box displays.

3.

Select a template from the Template list, or click Browse to find another template.

4. Click Export . 5. Select a location to save the file, and then click Save. The file saves to the selected folder. To view the file, open it in Excel from Windows Explorer . You can now make changes to the exported Excel files , and then import those changes into the Specification Editor. For more information on importing specifications to the Specification Editor, see Import Update From Excel (on page 123), Import data from Excel to a specification (on page 124), Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties (on page 113), and Cell Name Reference - Component Properties (on page 116).

Export to Text CADWorx Spec Editor Home Project tab: Export/Import Data > Export to Text Exports data from the selected specification to a text file. 1.


2.

On the Home tab, click Export to Text on the Export/Import Data panel. Alternatively, right-click, and then select Export Specific ation To Text.


122

Home Project Tab The Export Specification to Text dialog box displays.

3.

Select location to save the document, and then click Save. The text document saves to the selected folder.

To view the document open it in Windows Explorer .

Import Update From Excel CADWorx Spec Editor Project: Home Tab > Export/Import Data > Import Update From Excel

Imports data from an Excel file to a specification. File Path

Specifies the location of the Excel file. Select the components for import

Displays the information details for the import. Import

Enables you to select the items to import. Type

Displays the type of import if the im port contains a type. Description

Displays a description of the im port. For example, if you made a change t o the Pipe component, the Description displays the long description of the piping. However, if you changed the Component ID or the Program Code of Pipe in the Excel file, the description displays the Table Field types that display in Long in the New and Edit Component pane. Property

Displays the property that you changed in the Excel file. Ac ti on

Displays the action taken for the import. For example, if you change the Weight factor in the Excel file, the Acti on reads Update, because the action taken updates the specification. In addition, if you changed the Component ID or the Program Code of Pipe in the Excel file, the Acti on reads Addi tio n , because this action adds a new component to the specification. Existing Spec

Displays the value of the property from the existing specification. Excel Spec

Displays the value of the property from the Excel file. The value displayed here co mes from the changes made to the Excel file.


123

Home Project Tab Result

Displays success or failure of the imported property.





Success = Failure = Import data displays in red before import. After import you receive the following:

Saves backup pr oject

Saves a backup of the original project. View Lo g

Enables you to view a log of the import.

Import data from Excel to a specifi cation 1.


2.

On the Home tab, click Import Update From Excel on the Export/Import Data panel. Alternatively, right-click, and the select Import Update From Excel . The Import Excel Specification dialog box displays.

3. Click the File Path ellipsis, browse to the location where you stored the export, select it, and then click Open . The changes from the exported file populate the Import Excel Specification dialog box.

4. Review the data, and then select the check boxes of the components and properties you want to import. 5. Click Import . The data import runs.

6. Click Close. The Excel updates display in the required properties and components.

Editing Panel CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Editing Enables you to edit specified values. Find and Replace - Finds and replaces specific values. For more information, see Find and Replace (on page 125).


124

Home Project Tab

Find and Replace CADWorx Spec Editor Home tab: Editing > Find and Replace Finds and replaces specific values in the Specification Editor data.





The Find and Replace function only works with the Long Description , Short Description , or Tag boxes that consist of non-keyword texts. Any formatted keywords that exist in the Long , Short , or Tag boxes are not replaced when using the Replace function. For more information on Keywords, see Keywords in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The Specification Editor classifies keywords in four categories. First, the combination of the Fields and the table as in the case of SPEC_MAT_TBL which calls the SPEC field from the Material Table for the format. Second, a Field, such as USER_PART_NUMBER, by itself is a keyword. In addition, when you create a user defined field with the Custom Data option, the field name becomes a ke yword. Finally, a property by itself, such as COMPONENT_PTN, (which calls the Part Number property from the selected co mponent), is a keyword. For a listing of all the fields and properties in the Specification Editor, see Property Descriptions (on page 162). You can view all Keywords in the Description Format dialog boxes by selecting the ellipsis to the right of the boxes. For more information, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) and Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139).

Look in Current Project

Searches in the current project. Current Specification

Searches in the current specification.

Find options Match case

Matches the search to the case (lower or upper) in the Find what box. Match w hole word - Matches the search to the exact whole word in the Find what box. Search Up - Matches the search moving up wards in the Spec Editor rather than downwards.

Find type Long description

Matches the search to the long description. Short description

Matches the search to the short description.


125

Home Project Tab Tag

Matches the search to the tag data. Long description , Short description , and Tag can be selected at the same time so that the search finds all types as sociated with the text.

Find 1.

On the Home tab, click Find and Replace

on the Editing panel.

The Find and Replace dialog box displays.

2.

Type the text you want to find in the Find what box.

3.

Specify parameters for Look in , Find options , and Find type.

4.

Click Find Next . The value is found.

Replace 1.

On the Home tab, click Find and Replace

on the Editing panel.

The Find and Replace dialog box displays.

2.

Type the text you want to find in the Find what box.

3.

Select the Replace wit h check box. The Replace wit h box activates.

4.

Type the text to replace in the Replace wit h box.

5.

Specify parameters in Look in , Find options , and Find type.

6.

Click Find Next, and then click Replace. OR Click Replace. OR Click Replace All . Replace All replaces every instance of the text in the Find what box throughout the Specification Editor for the open project. Use this option with caution. The value is replaced.


126

SECTION 6

View Project Tab Select a check box to open each window. Display - Displays the Project Specs , Base Catalog Data, Project Catalog Data, Pipe Support Library , and Properties . For more information, see Display Panel (on page 127).

Display Panel CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display Project Specs - Displays the current project, and enables you to add, delete, o pen, and import specification data. For more information, see Project Specs (on page 127). Base Catalog Data - Displays all the information in the base catalog of CADWorx. For more information, see Base Catalog Data (on page 72). Project Catalog Data - Displays all the information attached to the open project. For more information, see Project Catalog Data (on page 127). Pipe Suppor t Library - Displays the Pipe Support Library pane, and enables you to add or import pipe supports to the project or pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Pipe Support Library (on page 128). Properties - Displays the properties of all the data in t he project. For more information, see Properties (on page 138).

Project Specs CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Project Specs Displays the current project, and enables you to add, delete, open, and import specification data. For more information, see Specification Panel (on page 77). Selecting the Project Specs check box, hides or displays the Project Specs view.

Project Catalog Data CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Project Catalog Data Displays all the information attached to the open project. The Project Catalog Data includes the information taken from the catalog and the information from the added specifications. Project Catalog Data enables you to view, but not change, the information. Edits can only be made when working with the edit options in the Home tab of the Spec Editor. Selecting the Project Catalog Data check box, hides or displays the Project Catalog Data view.


127

View Project Tab

Pipe Suppor t Li brary CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Pipe Support Library Displays the pipe supports associated with the current project, and enables you to add additional supports.

Right-click Menus Right-click the project or pipe support libraries file listed in the Pipe Support Library pane to access the following options: Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t L ib rar y

Enables you to add a new pipe support library to the project. For m ore information, see Add Pipe Support Library (on page 105). Import Pipe Support Library

Enables you to import a pipe s upport library. For more information, see Import Legacy Pipe Support Library (on page 107). Expand/Collapse

Expands or collapses the pipe supports in the project. Properties

Displays the Properties for the project. After adding a new pipe support, right-click the pipe support to get the following options: Open

Displays the pipe support New Component pane. Ad d Gr ou p Pip e Sup po rt As sem bl y

Enables you to add a new group to store a set of assemblies under. For more information, see Add Group Pipe Support Assembly (on page 129). Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t As sem bl y

Enables you to add a new assembly to a group assembly folder. For more information, see Add Pipe Support Assembly (on page 129). Copy Support Assembly

Enables you to make a copy of the pipe support. Remove

Enables you to remove the pipe support from the project. Rename

Enables you to rename the assembly file. Expand/Collapse

Expands or collapses the pipe supports in the project.


128

View Project Tab Properties

Displays the Pipe Support Library properties. Properties for the component table can be found in the Appendix. For more information, see PipeSupport (on page 206).




Add Pipe Support Library (on page 105) Import Legacy Pipe Support Library (on page 107)



Add Group Pipe Support Assembly (on page 129)



Add Pipe Support Assembly (on page 129)



Add a new support assembly (on page 132)



Edit a support assembly (on page 132)



Edit Pipe Support Component Pane (on page 133)



Edit a support component (on page 138)

Add Gr ou p Pi pe Supp or t As sem bl y CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Right-click the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > Right-click the pipe support library > Select Ad d Gr ou p Pi pe Support Assembly CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > Rightclick the library in the Pipe Support Library pane > Select Add Gro up Pip e Sup po rt As sem bl y Adds a new support group to the pipe support library in the .prj or .psl file. Group Name

Specifies the group name for a group of assem blies. This name displays in the CADWorx Support Modeler palette. Expanding the group name lists the assemblies under this group. From this location, you can edit the data contained in a specific assembly or a pipe support component. Description

Specifies a description of the assembly group.

Add Pi pe Supp or t Assem bl y CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Assembly > Right-click the project in the Pipe Support Library pane > Right-click the pipe support libraries file > Select Ad d Pi pe Su pp or t Assem bl y CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Assembly > Right-click the library in the Pipe Support Library pane > Select Add Pip e Sup po rt Assem bl y Controls parameters for adding and editing supports to the .prj or .psl file.


129

View Project Tab General:

Specifies general information about the pipe support such as the Name and Size Range. 

Group Name

Specifies the name for a group of assemblies. This name displays in the CADWorx Support Mod eler palette. Expanding the group name lists the assemblies under this group. From this location, you can edit the data contained in a specific assembly or a pipe support component. Specifies the name of the support. 

As sem bl y Nam e

Specifies the name of the assembly. 

Size Range

Specifies the sizes for the assembly. Insulation Options: 

Increase support size if compo nent is insulated

Automatically selects a larger size support component based on the insulation thickness. For example, a six-inch nominal si ze pipe (6.625 inch actual OD) has fourinch thick insulation (14.625 inch OD). This makes the total pipe diameter 6.625 i nch actual OD plus 8 inch insulation OD. The software determines the support by looking it up in the data file. 

Use next larger s ize if exact size is not available

Specifies that if the software does not contain the exact size support in the data file with the insulation, then the software selects the next larger size support. Components Available

Displays the support components that you can use to make an assembly. After you select a type, the list box shows the available data table for that type of support. Ad d

Moves the selected item from the Components Available list to the Components Selected list. Remove

Moves the selected item from the Components Selected list to the Components Available list. Components Selected

Displays the components in the assembly. The support builds using the selected components in the order shown. After you add an assem bly with a group of components, the individual pipe support components can be edited by expanding the assembl y, and then selecting the component you want to edit. For m ore information, see Edit Pipe Support Component Pane (on page 133). Move Up

Moves the selected item one position higher in the assembly sequence. Move Down

Moves the selected item one position l ower in the assembly sequence.


130

View Project Tab CAESAR II Type

Specifies the restraint type of the support for use in CAESAR II pipe stress analysis. BOM: 

Sort

Locates a component item in the bill of material schedule. Type the needed value. Type 0 to place the item first in the schedule. Type 999 to place the item last. If the same sort numbers are used for different components, they are placed in alphabetical order. 

Type

Specifies the bill of material type. Select Fabrication , Erection , Offshore, or Misc . Isogen Options: 

Identifier

Specifies the identifier value Isogen uses for an isometric drawing. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. 

SKEY

Specifies the SKEY value Isogen uses for an isometric drawing. If you do not specify an SKEY value, then CADWorx uses the default Isogen Support symbol during Isometric Drawing generation. For more information, see SKEY Information in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. 

Message Type

Specifies the format of text displayed with the support. 

Message Text

Specifies text displayed with the support. 

Detail Sketch

Specifies a .DWG AutoCAD file containing details about the support. Select the file from the Select detail sk etch fil e dialog box. Description: Long Describes the pipe support assembly. The bill of materials uses this description. Short Specifies the abbreviated description for the pipe support assem bly. Tag Specifies an optional tag description for the pipe support assembly. Part Number Specifies the part number information of the pipe support assembly. For more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 159). Notes Specifies any notes attached to the pipe support assem bly. 









What do you w ant to do?  

Add a new support assembly (on page 132) Edit a support assembly (on page 132)


131

View Project Tab Add a new support assembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Right-click the pipe support under the project or libraries file in the Pipe Support Library pane. Click Add Pi pe Su pp or t As sem bl y . The New assembly pane displays. Type a Group Name. Type an As sem bl y Nam e or use the default. Select the Size Range list, and then select or clear sizes from the list. Select the Insulation Options as needed by selecting their respective check boxes. Select a component from the Components Available list. You can repeat this as needed to build an assembly of c omponents. Use the Ad d or Remove arrows to move the component parts needed to the Components Selected box. Alternatively, you can drag the component parts needed to the Components Selected box. Use the Move Up or Move Down arrows to rearrange the order of the parts as they display in the drawing in the Components Selected box. Select a CAESAR II Type. Type the Sort for the bill of materials. Select the Type for the bill of materials. Type an Identifier . Select the SKEY for the support for isometric generation. Type a message text to appear for the pipe support. Select a Message Type. Select a Detail Sketch , by selecting the ellipsis. Type the long description in the Long box, or click … to set up a format. Type the short description in the Short box, or click … to set up a format. Type the tag in the Tag box, or click … to set up a format. Type the part number in the Part Number box, or click … to set up a format. Type the notes in the Notes box.

See Also Edit Pipe Support Component Pane (on page 133)

Edit a suppor t assembly 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8.

Click the pipe support assembly in the Pipe Support Library pane. The Edit assembly pane displays. Change the Group Name, if needed. Change the As sem bl y Nam e, if needed. Select the Size Range list, and then select or clear sizes from the list as needed. Select or clear the Insulation Options as needed. Select a component from the Components Available list to add a new component to the assembly. Use the Ad d or Remove arrows to move the component parts needed to or from the Components Selected box. Use the Move Up or Move Down arrows to rearrange the order of the parts as they display in the drawing in the Components Selected box. Change the CAESAR II Type as needed.


132

View Project Tab 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Change the Sort for the bill of materials, if needed. Change the Type for the bill of materials, if needed. Change the identifier for Isogen in the Identifier box, if needed. Change the SKEY for Isogen, if needed. Select a Message Type, if needed. Type a message text to appear for the pipe support. Select a Detail Sketch , by selecting the ellipsis. Update the long description in the Long box. Update the short description in the Short box. Update the tag in the Tag box. Update the part number in the Part Number box. Update the notes in the Notes box.

Edit Pipe Support Component Pane CADWorx Spec Editor Project: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > click a pipe support component, such as Pipe I_sup . CADWorx Spec Editor Pipe Support Library File: View Tab > Pipe Support Library > click a pipe support component, such as Pipe I_sup . Controls parameters for editing pipe support components in the project or .psl file. BOM: Sort Locates a component item in the bill of material schedule. Type the needed value. Type 0 to place the item first in the schedule. Type 999 to place the item last. If you specify the same sort numbers for different components, the software places those components in alphabetical order. Type Specifies the type of bill of material item. Select Fabrication , Erection , Offshore, or Misc . 



Steel Option The information in Steel Opt ion comes from the steel library that you set in the SteelLibrary property of you Pipe Support Library . These options only display if you have a steel component in your assembly, and only when you select that steel component. Steel L ength

Specifies the length of the steel. Member

Specifies the steel member name. Plate Width

Specifies the width of the plate on the steel. Center Lin e

Specifies the center line of the steel m ember. Plate Lengt h

Specifies the length of the plate on the steel.


133

View Project Tab Connections Ad d Adds a connection point to the Connection list. Remove Removes a connection point from the Connection list Connection List Displays the connections on the pipe support component. Select a connection to change the At tac h To , the End Type, and the Connect To options. At tac h To Specifies whether the connection of the part attaches to another pipe s upport part (Other ), a Pipe, or a Steel component. Other Specifies that the selected connection attaches to another pipe support part. For more information on how Al ig nm ent and Direction work in the Other option, see the examples below: Other Connection Example 1 

Other Connection Example 2


134

View Project Tab 

Pipe

Specifies that the selected connection attaches to a piece of pipe. For more information on how Al ig nm ent and Direction work in the Pipe option, see the examples below: When you select Pipe with the Offset to outside diameter of pipe option, the pipe support part sets perpendicular to the diameter of the pipe. Perpendicul ar to Pipe Outside Diameter

When you select Pipe without Offset to outside diameter of pipe option, the pipe support part sets perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe. Perpendicul ar to Pipe Centerline Example 1


135

View Project Tab Perpendicul Perpendicul ar to Pipe Centerline Centerline Example 2



Am Steel

Specifies that the selected connection attaches to a steel component. For m ore information on how Al ig nm ent and Direction work in the Steel option, see the example below: Steel Example

When you use the Steel connection type, the direction vector detects the steel, and the software does not use the alignment vector.


136

View Project Tab Offset to outsid e diameter diameter of pipe

When you check this box, the component connects to the outside diameter of the pipe. When you clear this box, the com ponent connects on the centerline of the pipe. You can only use this option when you select Pipe in the At tac h To list. Connect To

Specifies which connection point to attach the pipe support component. This option ta ch to list. If you select None, the becomes available when you select Other in in the At tach currently selected pipe support for that selected connection does not have a connecting component.

Connection Connection Point X

Specifies the x direction of the connection poi nt. Y

Specifies the y direction of the connection poi nt. Z

Specifies the z direction of the connection poi nt. Direction

Specifies the direction coordinates of the connection point, such as 0,0,0. Al ig nm ent

Specifies the alignment coordinates of the connection point, such as 1,0,0. Description: 

Long

Describes the pipe support component. The bill of materials uses this description. 

Short

Specifies the abbreviated description for the pipe supp ort component. 

Tag

Specifies an optional tag description for the pipe support component. 

Part Number

Specifies the part number information of the pipe support com ponent. For more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 159) page 159).. 

Notes

Specifies any notes attached to the pipe support com ponent.


137

View Project Tab Edit a support component 1.

Click pipe pipe support component under the assembly in the Pipe Support Library pane. The Edit component pane component pane displays.

2.

Change the Sort for the bill of materials, if needed.

3.

Change the Type for the bill of materials, if needed.

4.

Steel Length , if needed. Update the Steel

5.

Update the Member , if needed.

6.

Update the Plate Width , if needed.

7.

Center Li ne, if needed. Update the Center

8.

Update the Plate Length , if needed.

9.

Remove or add connections as needed needed in in the Connection list.

10. Select a connection in the connection list, and then change the At tac h Ty pe , the End Type, and the Connect To , as needed. 11. Update the X, Y, Z, Direction , and Al ig nm ent of the connection point. 12. Update the long description in the Long box. 13. Update the short description description in the Short box. 14. Update the tag in the the Tag box. 15. Update the part number number in the Part Number box. box. 16. Update the notes in the Notes box.

Properties CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Properties Displays the properties of the specific data you have selected in the project. You can use the Properties view to change the asp ects of a specification, project, catalog, or catalog table f ile. Data brings up the New Field or Edit Selecting the Fields ellipsis or double clicking Custom Data Field dialog box. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 72) page 72).. You can also Desc Form at Setup Setup , Short Desc Format Setup , Tag Format Setup , Part access the Long Desc Number Format Setup , Layer Manager , Material Material Ass ignment Setup , and Schedule As si gn men t Setu p and make changes. Different types of available options vary by component. Some components have available options that others do not have. You can find the property explanations in the Appendix.

See Also Als o Property Descriptions (on page 162) page 162) Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139) page 139) Layer Manager Dialog Box (on page 142) page 142) Matching End Type Table Dialog Box (on page 143) page 143) Material Assignment Setup (on page 144) page 144) Schedule Assignment Setup (on page 154) page 154)


138

View Project Tab

Descri Descri ption Format Format Dialog Box es Format CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties >
Specifies the description format. Descriptions display in the Short annotation , Long annotation , Tag , and Code boxes shown in the Component Edit dialog box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Component Edit dialog box is based on the associated component definition in the specification. The com ponent definition in the specification contains fields for Short Annotation , Long Annotation , Tag , and Part Number . These boxes can be populated with text data or by setting the schema in the Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) page 86) or or Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139) page 139).. annotation , Tag , and You can configure a description schema for the Short annotation , Long annotation Code boxes at the project level, the specification level, and the component level. If you define a schema at any of these levels, then the software derives the description from that level.

Component level schemas take precedence over specification level schemas and specification level schemas take precedence over project level schemas. For instance, if the sub-category Nipple under Pipe Pipe in the Component Component List tree has a schema defined, then the information displaying in CADWorx for Nipple derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Nipple sub category, then when you place a Nipple in the model, the schema Component List tree. derives from the Pipe category description schema under the Component If you remove the description schema in Pipe, the description derives from the Component description schema in the Component List tree. If you delete all of the description schemas at the component level, then the software repeats the above process in ternally at the specification level. Next, the software repeats this process at the project level. When the description format is empty at the component le vel, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) page 80) reads reads Using Specification Format. If the description format is empty at the component level and at the specification level, then the box under Description in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) page 80) reads reads Using Project Format . For more information on the component level, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) page 86).. Components List Component List consists of levels of formats Displays the available list of components. The Component as described above. The main Component level covers all com ponents. Next, the category level covers each category type of com ponent. The next level contains the individual components. The software reads the schemas that you place in e ach of these areas in order from bottom to top. The software always reads the individual components level first. If the individual component format is empty, then the software reads the category component level. If the category component level is empty, then the software reads the main component format.


139

View Project Tab Component Tables Tables drop-down

Displays the list of catalog tables to choose a format. 

Component Tables Tables

Lists the format types available for component tables i n Table Fields . 

Material Tables

Lists the format types available for material tables in Table Fields . 

Size Tables

Lists the format types available for size tables in Table Fields . 

Schedule Tables

Lists the format types available for schedule tables in Table Fields . 

DBCode Tables

Lists the format types available for database code tabl es in Table Fields . 

IndexCode Table

Lists the format types available for index codes tables in Table Fields. 

Thickness Tables Tables

Lists the format types available for thickness tables in Table Fields . This table is not Part Numb er Format. available in Part 

EndType Tables

Lists the format types available for end t ype tables in Table Fields . 

Spec Tables

Lists the format types available for spec tables in Table Fields . This table is not Part Numb er Format. available in Part 

End Prep Tables

Lists the format types available for the end prep tables in the Table Fields . This format contains the END_PREP_PTN schema. Select the END_PREP_PTN schema to add the PTN value from the end preparation table to your descriptions. You must select an End Prep Table Name in the specification Properties for the end preparation part number to display correctly. Then, set the PipeDescriptionCat Ap pl y Pi pe En d Prep Rul e in CADWorx Plant for the variable and the Appl END_PREP_PTN to display in your model. For more information, see PipeDescriptionCat and Apply Pipe End Prep Rule in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. To add an end preparation table, see End Prep Table (on page 54) page 54).. Table Fields

Lists the formats for the chosen table, and enables you to add the table field to the format. The DEFINED COMPTYPE in the Component Types view affects the COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL table field. Changing the value in the DEFINED COMPTYPE box changes the descriptions using COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL. The software reads the DEFINED COMPTYPE you specified for the component. The software then displa ys the new DEFINED COMPTYPE value as the description when using the COMPTYPE_CMP_TBL table field schema. For more information, see Component Types (on page 75) page 75)..


140

View Project Tab Format

Lists the format, and enables you to add the needed formats from the Table Fields box. If you have added a space or text in the Format box, then you can select and edit the space or text. Select the space or text, right-click, and t hen select Edit . Format

Displays the appearance of the format. You can now add a space or text to the for mat. When you click in the Format the space or text you have added appears. You can then edit the information here or in the Format. Blue words in Format are keywords and can be selected to copy. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. Example

Displays an example of the f ormat as it would appear in the software. Import

Imports formats from other projects. Export

Exports formats for use in other projects. 1.

Open an existing project or create a new project. The Format dialog boxes can be opened in both places. If creating a new project, sk ip to the second part of step 3.

2. Click the View tab, and then select Properties in the Display panel. 3. Click the Long Desc, Short Desc, Tag, or Part Numb er Format Setup box in the Properties window, and then click an ellipsis. OR Click Long Desc, Short Desc, Tag, or Part Number in the New Project window when creating a new project. The Format dialog box displays.

4. Select a component from the Components List . You can also import a format, and then edit it as needed. If you im port a format and do not want to edit it, skip to step 9. 5. Select a table from the tables list above Table fields . 6. Use the left or right arrows to move table boxes from one field to another. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to the format box. 7. Use the up

or down

arrows to move the format if needed.

If you want to remove a format, select it, and then press DELETE. 8. To edit the format appearance, select the format in the Format box, and then change the format in the Format box. 9. Click OK when finished. You can export the format for use in other specific ations. 10. Click File > Save to save changes to the project. The Format dialog boxes can also be accessed using the Ad d Specification command from the Home tab in the Specification panel.


141

View Project Tab

Layer Manager Dialog Bo x CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Layer Manager ellipsis Specifies layers that can be added to the project. The layers you create can be selected at the specification and component level from Layer Name in the Specification properties or the New Comp onent pane. Whichever color you set the Layer Color to in the Layer Manager for any layer appears in the dra wing when piping with that specification or drawing a component. This option can be accessed from the project properties or from the New Project dialog box. New Layer Enables you to add a new layer to the Layer Manager . Delete Layer Enables you to delete a la yer from the Layer Manager . Layer Name Specifies the name of the created layer. The la yer name is a default, such as New1, when first created. Select a layer name, then type the ne w name in the box to change any Layer Name. Layer Color Specifies the color of the created layer. Select a Layer Color to display a list and change the layer color. The default color is 1- Red . Select 1 - Red , 2 - Yello w , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 - White/Black from the list, or type 1 through 255 to specify other colors. You cannot use 0 - ByLayer. If you type 0, you receive the following message box: Invalid Color. Color must be 1 - 255. Click OK to return to the Layer Manager dialog box.

Use the up

or down

arrows to move the layers around.

1.

Open an existing project or create a new project. The Layer Manager dialog box can be opened in both places. If creating a new project, skip to the second part of step 3.

2.

Click the View tab, and then select Properties in the Display panel.

3.

Click the Layer Manager box in the Properties window, and then click the Layer Manager ellipsis. OR Click Layer Manager in the New Project window when creating a new project. The Layer Manager dialog box displays.

4.

Click New Layer

.

A new layer is added to the Layer Manager .



You can add as many layers as you want at the same time by repeatedly clicking New Layer .



Use the up

or down

arrows to move the layers up or down.



If you want to remove a format from Layer Manager , select it by clicking to the left of the name, and then click Delete Layer

.

5. Click OK when finished. 6.

Click File > Save to save changes to the project.


142

View Project Tab

Match ing End Type Table Dialog Box CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Match End Type ellipsis Enables you to match end types with each other to be used in the drawing. When placed in the model components are validated against this Matching End Types Table . The table works in conjunction with the Ap pl y En d Ty pe Ru le . For more information, see Apply End Type Rule in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. End Type List

Lists the available end types to match. Ad d L eft

Adds the end type to the left in the End Type Left column. Ad d Ri gh t

Adds the end type to the right in the End Type Right column. New

Creates a new line that enables you to add more matched end types to the Matched End Type list. Remove

Removes a matched end type from the Matched End Type list. Remove All

Removes all matching end type pairs from the Matched End Type list. Default

Sets the default matching end type pairs for the software. Matched End Type

Specifies the matched end types. All end types can be changed on either the right or the left by selecting an end type from the End Types List , selecting a row in Matched End Type, and then clicking either Ad d Ri gh t or Add L eft . 

End Type Left

Specifies the end type to the left col umn. 

End Type Right

Specifies the end type to the right col umn. Import

Imports matching end types from other projects. Export

Exports matching end types for use in other projects.


143

View Project Tab

Material Assignment Setup CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Material Assig nment Setup ellipsis Specifies the material assignment for each component and size. You can configure material assignments at the Components Group level, the Al l Com po nen ts level, the component group node level, and the component type node level. To assign a material to a component, you must select your material option f rom the Material list in the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80). Components List

Displays the Component Groups folder, the Al l Co mp on ent s folder, and the available list of components. The Component Groups folder contains all components for the specification. You use this to assign material to a component when you have no need to manage material assignment by nominal pipe size. F or the software to read the components group folder, you n eed to select Use Specific ation Material from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. The Al l Co mp on ent s folder contains options to create a Component Material Assign ment Setup . Inside the component material assignment setup you can assign material to the sizes. The component material assignment setup folders enable you to use the materials assigned to the sizes for all components in the software. When you select Use Specification Material and want the software to read from the Al l Com po nen ts folder , you cannot have any other material assignments in the Component Group node, or the Component Type node. To force the software to read the material from the All Components folder, select Al l Co mp on ent _1 from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. If you rename Al l Co mp on ent s_1 , then you need to select it by the name you created. When you add a Component Material Assi gnment Setup to a Component Group node, such as Caps , Couplings, or Crosses , those assignments become available to all components under the matching component group in the specification. T he Component Material Assig nment Setup under the component group node provides the material assignment by Nominal Pipe Size. When you select Use Specification Material and want the software to read from the Component Group node, you cannot have any other material assignments in the Component Type node. To force the software to read the material from the Component Group folder, select _1 from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. If you rename _1 , then you need to select it by the name you created. When you add a Component Material Assignment Setup to a Component Type node, such as Caps Buttweld , Cap Socket Weld , or Cap Threaded , those assignments become available to all components under the matching component type in the specification. The Component Material Assignm ent Setup under a piping component type node provides material assignment by nominal pipe size. The Component Material Assignment Setup under the Stud Bolts component type provides material assignment by bolt diameter. For the software to read the component type material assignments, you can se lect either Use Specification Material , or _1 in the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. If you select _1 from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane, this forces the software to read from that node. If you rename _1 , then you need to select it by the name you created.


144

View Project Tab The material assignments in the software read from the bottom upwards when you select Use Specifi cation Material from the Material list in the New and Edit Component pane. The software first checks the Component Type node, followed by the Component Group node, the Al l Com po nen ts folder, and finally, the Component Groups folder. If a component in the Component Type node, Component Group node, All Co mp on ent s folder, and the Component Groups folder does not contain a m aterial setting for the size or component, then that component displays in CADWorx Plant without a material assigned.





= A place holder for the name of the component. For example, Caps . = A place holder for the name of the component and the end type. For example, Cap Buttweld . Export Material

Exports material assignment data for use in another project. Import Material

Imports material assignment data for use in a project. Add n ew i tem

Adds new component material assignment setups to the Component Material Assign ment Setup list. Edit item name

Enables you to rename the component material assignment setup. Remove selected item

Removes the selected component material assignment setup. Component Groups folder

Enables you to assign material for each component at the specification level. 

Specifi cation-Level Material Assig nment

Displays the details of the m aterial assignment. 

As si gn Mat eri al

Enables you to assign material to a component. 

Component List

Displays a list of components to which you can assign material. 

Material Selection Li st

Enables you to select material for a sp ecific component. Al l Com po nen ts fo ld er

Customizes the materials for all sizes for all components. 

Component Material Assignm ent Setup

Enables you to create, rename, remove, export, and import component material assignment setups. You can either select a com ponent material assignment setup in the Components List , or double-click it in the Component Material Assignment Setup to display and edit the sizes.


145

View Project Tab 

Material Assi gnment Details

Specifies the material assignment data by size for all components. 

Size range fil ter

Enables you to filter sizes to quick ly update the material assignments for a specific group of sizes. The sizes available to filter are read from the Limit Spec Size Range To property in the Specification properties. If you want more default sizes to display in the filter, then you must select them in this property. You can also add sizes using the right-click option, Add New Si ze. 

Clear

Resets the size range filter. 

As si gn Mat eri al

Enables you to assign material to a size. 

Sizes Li st

Displays a list of sizes where you can assign material. 


Enables you to select material for a specific size. Component Group Node

Customizes the material for sizes of a specific com ponent. For instance, you can customize the materials for the Caps , the Crosses , or the Flanges , and so on. 

Material Assig nment Details

Specifies the material assignment data by size for the selected component group. 

Component Material Assignment Setup

Enables you to create, rename, remove, export, and import component material assignment setups. You can either select a com ponent material assignment setup in the Components List , or double-click it in the Component Material Assignment Setup to display and edit the sizes. 

Size range fi lter


Clear


As si gn Mat eri al


Sizes Li st



Enables you to select material for a specific size.


146

View Project Tab Component Type Node

Customizes the material for sizes of a specific component with a specific end type. For example, you can customize the materials for the Cap Butt weld , the Cap Socket Weld , or the Cap Threaded, and so on. 

Material Assi gnment Details

Specifies the material assignment data by size for the selected component type. 

Component Material Assignment Setup

Enables you to create, rename, remove, export, and import component material assignment setups. You can either select a com ponent material assignment setup in the Components List , or double-click it in the Component Material Assignment Setup to display and edit the material for the sizes. 

Size range fil ter


Clear


As si gn Materi al


Sizes Li st



Enables you to select material for a sp ecific size.

Right-click Menu Options There are several right-click menus in the Material Assign ment dialog box. You can right-click in Components List , the Component Material Assignment Setup list, and the Material As si gn men t Detai ls list. Ad d Mater ial As si gn men t Set up

Adds a material assignment schedule to the component group for you to edit. Remove All Material Ass ignm ent Setup

Removes all material assignment schedules from a com ponent group. Ad d It em

Adds a component material assignment setup to the Component Material Assignment Setup list.


147

View Project Tab Set Defaul t

Sets the selected material to the default selection in the Material option in the New and Edit Component pane. If you have more than one m aterial assignment in the Component Material As si gn men t Setu p list, you can right-click it and set as default. If you only have one material assignment in the Component Material Assignm ent Setup list, then it automatically becomes the default. Remove Default

Removes the default Component Material Assignment Setup that the Material list uses when you have selected Use Specification Material in the New and Edit Compo nent pane. When you remove the default of the component material assignment setup, the Material list selection of Use Specification Material in the New and Edit Component pane defaults to the Component Group folder. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80). Remove

Removes the selected item from the Component List , and removes multiple items from the Component Material Assignm ent Setup list. Rename

Enables you to rename the selected item. You can also click the item to rename it, or select the toolbar option.

Right-click Menu Options for Material Assignm ent Details Ad d New Si ze

Enables you to add a new nominal pipe size to the Material Ass ignment Details list. Displays the New Nominal Pipe Size dialog box. Edit Size

Enables you to edit an existing size in the Material Assi gnment Details list. Displays the Edit Nominal Pipe Size dialog box. Remove

Enables you to remove an existing size f rom the Material Ass ignment Details list. Material Lis t

Lists all available materials for the nominal pipe size. You can only access the following right-click options after you create a component material assignment setup for Stud Bolts . Ad d New Di amet er

Enables you to add a new bolt diameter to the Material Assi gnment Details list. Displays the New Bolt Diameter dialog box. Edit Bol t Diameter

Enables you to edit an existing bolt diameter in the Material Assi gnment Details list. Displays the Edit Bol t Diameter dialog box.


148

View Project Tab Import Material Assignment Setup File Dialog Box Enables you to review and im port a component material assignment setup. File Path

Specifies the location of the file for import. Material Assign ment Setup Li st

Lists the material assignment setups for import, and enables you to review the content.

New or Edit Nomi nal Pipe Size Dialog Box Enables you to add or edit a size for the Material Assi gnment Details list. Nominal Pipe Size

Enables you to add or edit a size. If you are adding a new size or editing a size, type the new size in the Nominal Pipe Size box, and then click OK . The new size adds to the Material Assi gnment Details list.

New or Edit Bol t Diameter Size Dialog Box Enables you to add or edit a bolt diameter for the Material Ass ignment Details list. Bolt Diameter

Enables you to add or edit a bolt diameter. If you are adding a new bolt diameter or editing a bolt diameter, type the new bolt diameter in the Bolt Diameter box, and then click OK . The new bolt diameter adds to the Material Assi gnment Details list.


Set material assignment for all components (on page 149)



Set material assignment for all components based on size (on page 150)



Set material assignment for a specific component (on page 151)



Set material assignment for a specific component with a specific end type (on page 152)



Export a material assignment setup (on page 153)



Import a material assignment setup (on page 153)



Display the material assigned to the component in CADWorx Plant (on page 153)

Set material assignm ent for all com ponents 1.

Select a specification from Project Specs.

2. Select Material Assi gnment Setup in the Properties window, and then click the Material As si gn men t ellipsis. The Material Assi gnment dialog box displays.

3. Select Component Groups .


149

View Project Tab 4.

In the Assi gn Materi al list, select a new material in the right column f rom the list that displays for the component. Material numbers in this lis t are based on industry standards. To access detailed information on a m aterial number in the Assi gn Materi al list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Material Table. You can export or import material data while assigning material to all components.

5.

Click OK .

6.

In the Main Spec List View, expand a component list, such as Caps , and then select a component, such as Cap Buttweld to assign a material.

7.

Select the Material list in the Edit component pane, and then select Use Specificatio n Material . For the software to read the material from the Component Groups folder, you cannot have any other material assignments in the All Com po nen ts folder, the Component Group node, or the Component Type node. The software reads the Material Assig nment set for the component you selected. For example, if you set the Caps material to ASTM A105 in the Component Groups folder of the Material Assig nment dialog box, and then set the Cap Butt weld material in the specification to Use Specification Material, the Cap Butt weld material would be ASTM A105.

See Also Display the material assigned to the component in CADWorx Plant (on page 153)

Set material assignment fo r all c omponents based on size 1.



3. Select All Com po nen ts . 4.

Click Add n ew i tem

. You can repeat this step as necessary.

A new component material assignment setup displays.

5.

Double-click the new component material assignment setup.

6.

In the As si gn Materi al list, select a new material in the right column from the list that displays for each size. Material numbers in this list are based on industry standards. To access detailed information on a material number in the Assi gn Materi al list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Material Table. Use the Size Filter sliders to quickly display the sizes you need to change.

7.

Click OK .

8.

In the Main Spec List View, expand a component list, such as Caps , and then select a component, such as Caps Buttweld, to assign a material.


150

View Project Tab 9.

Select the Material list in the Edit component pane, and then select Use Specificatio n Material or All Co mp on ent _1.





When you select Use Specification Material and want the software to read from the All Components folder , you cannot have any other material assignments in the Component Group node, or in the Component Type node. To force the software to read the material from the All Components folder, select All Co mp on ent _1. You can rename the component material assignment setups. However, if you rename the material setup, you must remember the name of the all components material assignment setup and select it in step 9.

The software reads the Material Assig nment set for the size in the Material Assignment Details. For example, if you set the material of the 2.0000 inch size to ASTM A105 in the Al l Co mp on ent _1 folder of the Material Assig nment dialog box, and then set the material for any component to Al l Com po nen t_1, the 2-inch component material would be ASTM A105. However, if you set the material of the 4.0000 inch size to ASTM A193-B 7, then the 4-inch component material would be ASTM A193-B 7.


Set material assignment for a specifi c comp onent 1.



3.

Select a component, such as Caps .

4.

Click Add n ew i tem

. You can repeat this step as necessary.

A new component material assignment setup displays.

5.

Double-click the new component material assignment setup.

6.

In the Assi gn Materi al list, select a new material in the right column f rom the list that displays for each size. Material numbers in this list are based on industry standards. To access detailed information on a material number in the Ass ig n M ater ial list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Material Table. Use the Size Filt er sliders to quickly display the sizes you need to change.

7.

Click OK .

8.

In the Main Spec List View, expand a component list, such as Caps , and then select a component, such as Caps Buttweld, to assign a material.


151

View Project Tab 9.

Select the Material list in the Edit component pane, and then select Use Specificatio n Material or _1. When you select Use Specification Material and want the software to read from the Component Group node, you cannot have any other material assignments in the Component Type node. To force the software to read the material from the Component Group folder, select < Component>_1. You can rename the component material assignment setups. However, if you rename the material setup, then you must remember the name of the component m aterial assignment setup and select it in step 9. The software reads the Material Assig nment set for the size in the Material Assign ment Details. For example, if you set the material of the 2.0000 inch size to ASTM A105 in the Cap_1 folder of the Material Assig nment dialog box, and then set the component material of the Cap Buttweld to Cap_1, the 2-inch Cap Butt weld material would be ASTM A105. In addition, if you set the material of the 4.0000 inch size to ASTM A193-B 7, then the 4-inch Cap Butt weld material would be ASTM A193-B 7. 




Set material assignm ent for a specific com ponent with a specific end type 1. Select a specification from Project Specs. 2. Select Material Assi gnment Setup in the Properties window, and then click the Material As si gn men t ellipsis. The Material Assi gnment dialog box displays. 3. Select a component type node, such as Cap Butt weld . 4.

Click Add n ew i tem . You can repeat this step as necessary. A new component material assignment setup displays. 5. Double-click the new component material assignment setup. 6. In the As si gn Materi al list, select a new material in the right column from the list that displays for each size. Material numbers in this list are based on industry standards. To access detailed information on a material number in the Assi gn Materi al list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Material Table. 7. 8. 9.

Use the Size Filt er sliders to quickly display the sizes you need to change. Click OK . In the Main Spec List View, expand a component list, such as Caps , and then select a component, such as Cap Buttweld, to assign a material. Select the Material list in the Edit component pane, and then select Use Specificatio n Material or _1 . You can rename the component material assignment setups. However, if you rename the material setup, then you must remember the name of the component material assignment setup and select it in step 9. The software reads the Material Assig nment set for the size in the Material Assignment Details. For example, if you set the material of the 2.0000 inch size to ASTM A105 in Cap Buttweld_1 of the Material Assi gnment dialog box, and then set the component material of Cap But tweld to Use Specific ation Material or Cap Buttweld_1, the 2-inch Cap Buttweld material would be ASTM A105. In addition, if you set the material of the 4.0000 inch size to ASTM A193-B 7, then the 4-inch Cap Buttw eld material would be ASTM A 193B7.



152

View Project Tab Export a material assignment setup 1.


2. Select Material Assi gnment Setup in the Properties window, and then click the ellipsis. The Material Assi gnment dialog box displays.

3.

Select a component or folder.

4. Click Export Material

.

5. Browse to the location where you want to store the exported material, and then click Save. 6. Click OK .

Import a material assignm ent setup 1.


2. Select Material Assi gnment Setup in the Properties window, and then click the ellipsis. The Material Assi gnment dialog box displays.

3.

Select a component or folder.

4. Click Import Material

.

5. Browse to the location of the material you exported, select it, and then click Open . The Import Material Assig nment dialog box displays

6. Check the File Path . 7. Expand the list of component material assignment setups to review the data. 8. Click Import . 9. Click Close. The software places the material assignment in the correct component group.

Display the material assigned to th e component i n CADWorx Plant After you have assigned material in the Material Assig nment dialog box, and defined the material in the Material list of the Edit component pane, you must complete the following steps to display the material correctly in CADWorx Plant. 1.

Click a Description ellipsis.

2. Select Material Tables from the Component Tables list. 3.

Select SPEC_MAT_TBL and GRADE_MAT_TBL, and then click Move right

4.

Click OK .

.

The material for the component now displays in CADWorx plant based on the Spec and Grade.


153

View Project Tab

Schedule As signment Setup CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Schedule Assignment Setup ellipsis Specifies the schedule assigned to each size. The schedule assignment for a size can be changed. 1. Select Schedule Assignment Setup in the Properties window, then click the Schedule As si gn men t Set up ellipsis. 2. Select a size in Schedule Assignment , and then select a new schedule in the right column, by using the drop-down arrow. Schedules in this list are based on the sc hedules assigned to the sizes in the Schedule Tables file. To access detailed information on a schedule in the schedule list, open the Base Catalog Data, and then open the Schedule Table.


154

SECTION 7

Pipe Support Library File Home Tab Gives you access to the features in an open pipe support libraries file. Unavailable features are grayed out. Clipboard - Enables you to edit the boxes within the Spec Editor. For more information, see Clipboard Panel (on page 23). Pipe Suppor t - Enables you to add pipe supports to the project. For more information, see Pipe Support Panel (on page 105). Catalog - Enables you to update the project with changes made to the base catalog. For more information, see Catalog Panel (on page 108). Transfer Data - Enables you to transfer project, catalog, or pipe support data. For m ore information, see Transfer Data Panel (on page 65). Exit Spec Editor - Closes the Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor.


155

SECTION 8

Pipe Support Library File View Tab Select a check box to open each window. Display - Displays the Pipe Support Library , Base Catalog Data, Project Catalog Data, and Properties. For more information, see Display Panel (on page 156).

Display Panel CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display Pipe Suppor t Library - Displays the Pipe Support Library pane, and enables you to add or import pipe supports to the pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Pipe Support Library (on page 128). Base Catalog Data - Displays all the information in the base catalog of CADWorx. For more information, see Base Catalog Data (on page 72). Project Catalog Data - Displays all the information attached to the open project. For more information, see Project Catalog Data (on page 127). Properties - Displays the properties of all the data in the pipe support libraries file. For more information, see Properties (on page 138).

Properties CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Properties Displays the properties of the specific data you have selected in the pipe support libraries file. You can use the Properties view to change the aspects of a pipe support libraries file, the pipe support library, the pipe support assembly, and the pi pe support component. Double-clicking Custom Data brings up the New Field or Edit Field dialog box. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 72). You can also access the Long Desc Format Setup , Short Desc Format Setup , Tag Format Setup , Part Number Format Setup , and make changes. You can find the property explanations in the Appendix.

See Also Property Descriptions (on page 162) Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 157) Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 159)


156

Pipe Support Library File View Tab

Pipe Support Descri ption Format Dialog Boxes CADWorx Spec Editor View tab: Display > Properties > Format Setup ellipsis Specifies the description format for a pipe support. Descriptions display in the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes for an assembly and in Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes for a part shown in the Pipe support assembly edit dialog box when you double-click a pipe support i n CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Pipe support assembly edit dialog box is based on the associated pipe support definition in the specification. The pipe support definition in the specification contains fields for Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number . You can populate these boxes with text data or set the schema in the Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 159) or Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 157). You can configure a description schema for the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes at the libraries level, the library level, the pipe support assembly level, and the pipe support component level. If you define a sc hema at any of these levels, then the software derives the description from that level. Pipe support component schemas and pipe support assembly schemas take precedence over pipe support library level schemas, and pipe support library level schemas take precedence over pipe support libraries level s chemas. For instance, if the component Beam Clamp has a schema defined, then the information displaying i n CADWorx for Beam Clamp derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Beam Clamp , then when a Beam Clamp places as part of an assembl y in the model, the schema derives from the main Pipe Suppor t Library tree description schema. If you delete all of the description schemas at the pipe support component level or at the pipe support assembly level, then the software repeats the above process at the pipe support library level. Next, the software repeats this process at the lib raries level. When the description format is empty at the component level or the assembly level, then the boxes under Description in the Edit panes read Using Pipe Suppor t Libr ary Format. If the description format is empty at the component level or the assembly level and at the library level, then the boxes under Description in the Edit panes read Using Pipe Support Libr ary Format. For more information on the pipe support component l evel and the pipe support assembly l evel, see Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86). Pipe Support Libraries Component List

Displays the available list of pipe support components. The Pipe Suppor t Librari es Component List consists of two levels of formats. The main Pipe Suppor t Libr aries level covers all components. Next, the pipe support component level co vers each type of component and the steel components. The next level contains the individual components. The software reads the schemas that you place in each of these areas in order from bottom to top. The software always reads the individual compo nents level first. If the individual component format is empty, then the software reads the category component level. If the category component level is empty, then the software reads the m ain component format. Tables

Displays a list of tables, which allow you to choose formats to place for descriptions.


157

Pipe Support Library File View Tab 

Size Tables

Lists the format types available for si ze tables in Table Fields . These properties are contained in the Size Table in the catalog. 

Pipe Suppor t or Steel Compo nent Table

Lists the format types available for the selected pipe support or steel component in Table Fields . The properties listed come from the components listed under PipeSupport in the Data Tables of the catalog. 

Pipe Suppor t Lib raries Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe support libraries tables in Table Fields . The properties listed come from the Name and Description fields in the Pipe Suppor t Libraries Properties . 

Pipe Suppor t Libr ary Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe support library tables in Table Fields . The properties listed come from the Name and Description fields in the Pipe Suppor t Library Properties . Table Fields

Lists the formats for the chosen table, and enables you to add the table field to the format. Format

Lists the format, and enables you to add the needed formats from the Table Fields box. If you have added a space or text in the Format box, then you can select and edit the space or text. Select the space or text, right-click, and then select Edit . Format

Displays the appearance of the format. You can add a space or text to the format. Blue words in Format are keywords and can be selected to copy. Black text is a simple text string and can be edited as needed. Example

Displays an example of the format as it would display in the software. Import

Imports formats from other projects. Export

Exports formats for use in other projects. 1. Open an existing pipe support libraries file, or create a new pipe support libraries file. You can open the Format dialog boxes in both places. If creating a new pipe support libraries file, skip to the second part of step 3. 2. Click the View tab, and then select Properties in the Display panel.


158

Pipe Support Library File View Tab 3.

Click the Long Desc, Short Desc, Tag, or Part Number Format Setup box in the Properties window, and then click …. OR Click Long Desc, Short Desc, Tag, or Part Number in the New Pipe Support Li braries dialog box when creating a new pipe support libraries file. The Format dialog box displays.

4.

Select the main Pipe Support Libraries folder, or select a pi pe support component from the Pipe Support Lib raries Component List . You can also import a format, and then edit it as needed. If you import a format and do not want to edit it, skip to step 9.

5.

Select a table from the Tables list above Table fi elds .

6. Use the left or right arrows to move table properties from one field to another. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to the Format box. 7. Use the up

or down


If you want to remove a format, select it, and then press DELETE. 8. To edit the format appearance, select the format in the Format box, and then change the format in the Format box. 9. Click OK when finished. You can export the format for use in other proj ects or pipe support libraries files. 10. Click File > Save to save changes to the project.

Pipe Support Long , Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes CADWorx Spec Editor New component pane: Click the Long , Short , Tag , or Part Number ellipsis Specifies the description format for pipe support components or pipe su pport assemblies. Descriptions display in the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes for an assembly and in Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes for a part shown in the Pipe support assembly edit dialog box when you double-click a pipe support in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. The information the software displays in the Pipe support assembly edit dialog box is based on the associated pipe support definition in the specification. The pipe support definition in the specification contains fields for Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number . You can populate these boxes with text data or set the schema in the Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 159) or Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 157). You can configure a description schema for the Long , Short , Tag , and Part Number boxes at the libraries level, the library level, the pipe support assembly level, and the pipe support component level. If you define a schema at any of these levels, then the software derives the description from that level.


159

Pipe Support Library File View Tab Pipe support component schemas and pipe support assembly schemas take precedence over pipe support library level schemas, and pipe support library level schemas take precedence over pipe support libraries level schemas. For instance, if the component Beam Clamp has a schema defined, then the information displaying in CADWorx for Beam Clamp derives from this schema. If you remove the schema definition from the Beam Clamp , then when a Beam Clamp places as part of an assembl y in the model, the schema derives from the m ain Pipe Suppor t Library tree description schema. If you delete all of the description schemas at the pipe support component level or at the pipe support assembly level, then the software repeats the above process at the pipe support library level. Next, the software repeats this process at the libraries le vel. When the description format is empty at the component le vel or the assembly level, then the boxes under Description in the Edit panes read Using Pipe Support Libr ary Format. If the description format is empty at the component level or t he assembly level and at the library level, then the boxes under Description in the Edit panes read Using Pipe Suppor t Libr ary Format.

Tables Size Tables

Lists the format types available for size tables in Table Fields . These properties are contained in the Size Table in the catalog. The properties listed in Table Fields come from the components listed under PipeSupport in the Data Tables of the catalog. Pipe Support Li braries Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe sup port libraries tables in Table Fields . The properties listed in Table Fields come from the Name and Description fields in the Pipe Support Libraries Properties . Pipe Suppor t Lib rary Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe sup port library tables in Table Fields . The properties listed in Table Fields come from the Name and Description fields in the Pipe Support Library Properties . Pipe Support Assembly Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe sup port assembly tables in Table Fields . The properties listed in Table Fields come from the the data displayed in the Edit assembly pane, and the Name and Description in the Pipe Suppor t Assembly Properti es. Pipe Suppor t Compon ent Tables

Lists the format types available for pipe support com ponent tables in Table Fields . The properties listed in Table Fields come from the components listed under PipeSupport in the Data Tables of the catalog.

Long, Short, Tag, or Part Number Format dialog box fields Table Fields

Lists the long or short description format, the tag format, or the part number format for the chosen table, and enables you to add the table field to the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number Format.


160

Pipe Support Library File View Tab Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number

Lists the actual long or short description format, tag format, or part number format, and enables you to add information. Use the arrows to add formats from the Table Fields box. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to Long Desc, Short Desc , Tag, or Part Number Format . Format

Displays the actual appearance of the long or short description, the tag, or part num ber format. When you click in the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number box, the space or text you added displays. You can then edit the information here or in the Long Desc Format , Short Desc Format , Tag Format , or Part Number box. Blue words in Format are keywords. You can select keywords and then copy them. Black text is a simple text string and you can edit as needed. Example

Displays an example of the long or short description, tag, or part number as it displays in the software.

Setup t he Assembly or Component Formats 1.

Click … for the field to edit. The Format dialog box displays.

2.

Select the Tables list, and change if needed.

3.

Use the left or right arrows to move table properties from one field to another. Alternatively, you can drag or double-click a format to add it from Table Fields to the corresponding format.

4.

Use the up

5.

To edit the format appearance, select the table in the Format box, and then change the format in the Format box.

6.

Click OK when finished.

7.

Click File > Save to save the changes to the project.

or down



161

A P P E N D I X A

Property Descriptions This appendix contains all the property descriptions available in CADWorx Spec Editor.

In This Ap pendix Project Properties .......................................................................... 162 Pipe Support Libraries Properties.................................................. 166 Catalog Properties ......................................................................... 170

Project Properties Project Name

Specifies the name of the project. Catalog Name

Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only edit this in the catalog or by selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path

Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalog b y using the Catalog Path ellipsis. Pipe Support Libraries Path

Specifies the folder location of the pipe support library. You can add a p ipe support library to your specification using the Pipe Suppor t Libr aries Path ellipsis. This allows you to have more than one set of libraries attached to a project. DBCode Table Name

Specifies the name of the database code table from the base catalog. Long Desc Format Setup


Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the components. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the c omponents. For more on the Format Setups , see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139).


162

Property Descriptions BOM Type

Specifies the bill of material type associated with the project. You can edit this b y clicking the name of the BOM Type, and using the list that displays. Layer Manager

Specifies the layers associated with a project and displays the Layer Manager dialog box. For more information, see Layer Manager Dialog Box (on page 142). Match End Type

Displays the Matching End Type Table dialog box. You can match end types with other end types for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Matching End Type Table Dialog Box (on page 143). Version

Specifies the version of the CADWorx Spec Editor. You cannot edit this property. Created By

Specifies the person who created the data. You can edit this property. Edited By

Specifies the person who edited the data. You can edit this property. Description

Specifies the description of the project. Default OTAP SKEY

Specifies the default SKEY that the software uses for OTAPs. This property enables you to standardize the OTAP for isometric notation for the project. You can edit this property. If you open a project created with CADWorx 2015 SP1 or earlier in CADWorx Spec Editor 2016, the software updates the OTAP SKEY of the specification automatically. Custom Data

Add custom data to the project. For more information see, New Field Dialog Box (on page 72).

Specification Properti es Specifi cation Name

Specifies the name of the specification being worked in. You can edit this property. Catalog Name

Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only edit this property in the catalog or by selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path

Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalog b y using the Catalog Path ellipsis.


163

Property Descriptions Pipe Support Libraries Path

Specifies the folder location of the pipe support library. You can add a p ipe support library to your specification using the Pipe Suppor t Libr aries Path ellipsis. This allows you to have another pipe support library attached to the specification. Measure/Bore

Specifies the units tied to this specification. You cannot edit this property. Size Table Name

Specifies the current size table being used b y the specification. You can only edit this property in the catalog. DBCode Table Name

Specifies the name of the database code table f rom the base catalog. Thickness Table Name

Specifies the current thickness table being used b y the specification. To update this value with available or newly created thickness tables, click the name of the first table, and then select the new table from the list. For m ore information, see Thickness Table (on page 42). Material Table Name

Specifies the current material table being used b y the specification. To update this value with available or newly created material tables, click the name of the first table, and select the new table from the list. For m ore information, see Material Table (on page 38). Bolt Diameter Table Name

Specifies the current bolt diameter table assigned to the specification. T o update this value with available or newly created bolt diam eter tables, click the name or the blank space, and then select a table from the list. For more information, see Bolt Diameter Table (on page 32). Bolt Length Table Name

Specifies the current bolt length table assigned to the specification. To update this value with available or newly created bolt length tables, click the name or the blank space, and then select a table from the list. For more information, see Bolt Length Table (on page 35). End Prep Table Name

Specifies the current end prep table assigned to the specification. To update this value with available or newly created end prep tab les, click the name or the bl ank space, and then select a table from the list. For m ore information, see End Prep Table (on page 54). Weight Factor

Specifies the weight of the component. You can edit t his property. Component Class

Specifies the classification of the components in the specification. Temperature Rating

Specifies the temperature rating a component can handle. Pressure Rating

Specifies the pressure rating a component can handle.


164

Property Descriptions Layer Name

Specifies the numerical value of the la yer spec. Au to CAD Co lo r Index [0-255]

Specifies the color appearance of the components when using this specification to draw. Select 0 - ByLayer , 1 - Red , 2 - Yello w , 3 - Green , 4 - Cyan , 5 - Blue, 6 - Magenta, 7 White/Black, from the list or type 0 through 255 to specify other colors. Long Desc Format Setup


Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the c omponents. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the components. Part Numb er Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the components. For more on the Format Setups , see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139). Lim it Spec Size Range To

Specifies the size limit for components within this specification. This can be edited. You must select newly added sizes in the Limit Spec Size Range To list. Otherwise, the software does not display the sizes in the Size Range list on the New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80). Material Assig nment Setup

Specifies material numbers for specific components. For more information, see Material Assignment Setup (on page 144). Schedule Assignment Setup

Specifies the schedule values for specific sizes based on the schedule table. For more information, see Schedule Assignment Setup (on page 154). Default Flange Type

Specifies the default flange type for the specification. You can edit this property. Reducing Component Size Selection

Specifies the reduction size setting. There are three options: 

Use Reducti on Size

Uses the reduction size for the component. 

Use Main Size

Uses the main size for the c omponent. 

Use Larger Wall Thic kness

Uses a larger wall thickness for the c omponent.


165

Property Descriptions Version



Specifies the person who edited the data. You can edit this property. Spec Descriptio n

Specifies the description of the spec. Default OTAP SKEY

Specifies the default SKEY that the software uses for OTAPs. This property enables you to standardize the OTAP for isometric notation for the specification. If you do not set a default OTAP SKEY for the specification, then the software takes the SKEY from the project properties setting. You can edit this property. If you open a project created with CADWorx 2015 SP1 or earlier in CADWorx Spec Editor 2016, the software updates the OTAP SKEY of the specification automatically. Custom Data

Add custom data to the specification. For more information see, New Field Dialog Box (on page 72).

Pipe Support Libraries Properties Pipe Support Libraries Name

Specifies the name of the selected pipe support l ibraries file. If you are working in a project, the name defaults to the name of the project. If you are working in a pipe support libraries file, the name defaults to the name of the pipe support libraries file. You can edit this property. Catalog Name

Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only change this in the catalog or by selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path

Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalo g by using the Catalog Path ellipsis. Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long description attached to the assemblies or components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the assem blies or components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the assemblies or components.


166

Property Descriptions Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the assem blies or components. For more information on the Format Setups , see Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 157). BOM Type

Specifies the bill of material type associated with the pipe support libraries file. You can edit this by clicking the name of the BOM Type, and using the list that displays. Version




Specifies the description of the catalog. Change as needed. Custom Data

Add custom data to the project. For more information see, New Field Dialog Box (on page 72). To see the Component Table properties, see Common Component Properties (on page 180) and PipeSupport (on page 206).

Pipe Support Libr ary Properties Name

Specifies the name of the selected pipe support l ibrary. You can edit this property. Catalog Name

Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only change this in the catalog or by selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path

Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalog b y using the Catalog Path ellipsis. Measure/Bore

Specifies the units tied to this pipe support library. You cannot edit this property. Size Table Name

Specifies the current size table being used by the pipe support library. You can only edit this property in the catalog.


167

Property Descriptions Lim it Spec Size Range To

Specifies the size limit for components within this pi pe support library. Select or clear the check boxes in the list to add or remove size ranges. You must select n ewly-added sizes in the Limit Spec Size Range To list. Otherwise, the software does not display the sizes in the Size Range list on the Edit assembly pane. See Add Pipe Support Assembly (on page 129). Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the long description attached to the assemblies or components. Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the short description format attached to the assem blies or components. Tag Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the tag format attached to the assemblies or components. Part Number Format Setup

Specifies the appearance of the part number attached to the assem blies or components. For more information on the Format Setups , see Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 157). Version


Specifies the person who created the data. You can e dit this property. Edited By


Specifies the description of the catalog. Change as needed. Steel Lib rary

Specifies the location of the steel library, and enables you to include a steel component in your assembly. SteelPartNumberFile

Specifies the steel part number file from the steel l ibrary. Custom Data

Add custom data to the project. For more information see, New Field Dialog Box (on page 72).


168

Property Descriptions

Pipe Support Assembly and Component Properties Name

Specifies the name of the selected support component. You can edit this property. Long Desc Format Setup

Specifies the long description for the pipe sup port assembly or component. You can change the long description, by clicking the Long ellipsis which opens the Long Description Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Long box, and then click Ap pl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a simple text string and c an be edited as needed. For more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 159). Short Desc Format Setup

Specifies the short description of the pipe support assembl y or component. You can change the short description, by clicking the Short ellipsis which opens the Short Description Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Short box, and then click Appl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you c an select and copy them. Black text is a simple text string and c an be edited as needed. F or more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 159). Tag Format Setup

Specifies the tag information of the pipe support asse mbly or component. You can change the tag format, by clicking the Tag ellipsis which opens the Tag Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Tag box, and then click Ap pl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a s imple text string and can be edited as needed. F or more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 159). Part Numb er Format Setup Specifies the part number information of the pipe support assembl y or component. You can change the part number format, by clicking the Part Number ellipsis which opens the Part Number Format dialog box. You can also type information in the Part Number box, and then click Appl y to add the information. Blue words are keywords and you can select and copy them. Black text is a sim ple text string and can be edited as needed. For more information, see Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 159). Version Specifies the version of the CADWorx Spec Editor. You cannot edit this property. Created By Specifies the person who created the data. You can e dit this property. Edited By Specifies the person who edited the data. You can edit this property. Description Specifies the description of the catalog. You can e dit this property. Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 72). You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide.


169


Catalog Properties Name

Specifies the name of the catalog being worked in. You can edit this property. Measure/Bore

Specifies the units tied to this catalog. You c an edit this property. Base Catalog Name

Specifies the name of the base catalog. You can only change this in the Catalog or by selecting a different base catalog. Catalog Path

Specifies the folder location of the base catalog. You can change the base catalog by using the Catalog Path ellipsis. Version


Specifies the person who created the data. You can edit t his property. Edited By

Specifies the person who edited the data. You can edit this property. Catalog Descriptio n

Specifies the description of the catalog. You can edit this property. Each of the tables in the catalog has its own properties. Some fields in the Specification Editor create new records in the database immediately when you edit them. For example, if you change the MAINSIZE value in the Size Tables , the software creates a new record in the database. When you edit one of these fields, CADWorx Spec Editor displays a message explaining that you are creating a new record and ask ing if you want to continue. For more information, see the following topics: 

Size Tables Properties (on page 171)



Bolt Diameter Table Properties (on page 171)



Bolt Length Table Properties (on page 172)



Material Tables Properties (on page 173)



Schedule Tables Properties (on page 174)



Thickness Tables Properties (on page 175)



EndType Tables Properties (on page 176)



Data Tables Properties (on page 179)



IndexCode Tables Properties (on page 236)



DBCode Tables Properties (on page 236)



End Prep Tables Properties (on page 237)


170


Size Tables Properties Table Name

Specifies the name of the table selected. This can be edited. Measure/Bore

Specifies the units tied to this catalog. You c annot edit this. The value comes from the units selected when creating the catalog. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. T his can be edited. The default is 001 and auto-populated by the Specification Editor. Version




Specifies the description of the table. This can be edited.

Fields NOM - Nominal Pipe Size The nominal sizes of the pipe. OD - Outside Diameter The diameter of the pipe. DESCRIPTION - Description The description of the pipe size. PTN - Part Number The part number assigned to the si ze. Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 72).

Bolt Diameter Table Properti es Table Name


Specifies the units tied to this catalog. You c annot edit this. The value comes from the units selected when creating the catalog.


171

Property Descriptions Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. T his can be edited. The default is 001 and auto-populated by the Specification Editor. Version





Fields DIAMETER - Diameter Specifies the diameters of each bolt. DESCRIPTION - Description Specifies the description of the bolt diameter. PTN - Part Number Specifies the part number assigned to the bolt di ameter. Custom Data


Bolt Length Table Properties Table Name


Specifies the units tied to this catalog. You c annot edit this. The value comes from the units selected when creating the catalog. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. This can be edited. The default is 001 and auto-populated by the Specification Editor. Version


Specifies the person who created the data. You can edit t his property. Edited By




172

Property Descriptions Fields LENGTH - Length The lengths of each bolt. DESCRIPTION - Description The description of the bolt length. PTN - Part Number The part number assigned to the bolt length. Custom Data


Material Tables Properties Table Name

Specifies the name of the table selected. This can be edited. Version





Fields SPEC - Material Specification Value that specifies the material spec. GRADE - Grade Value that specifies the grade of the material. COMPOSITION - Composition Value that specifies the composition of the material. COMPTYPES - Component Types The type of component the material type is associated with. Use the list to add component types. DENSITY - Density Value that specifies the density of the material. PTN - Part Number The part number associated with a particular value of material. Custom Data



173


Schedule Tables Properti es Table Name

Specifies the name of the table selected. This can be edited. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. T his can be edited. Version





Fields SCH - Schedule The schedule of the thickness for components. SCHENCWT - Schedule Enhance Weight The schedule used with enhanced weight calculation. Enhanced weight calculation calculates the weights of components based on the AutoCAD solid geometry, calculated b y (the hollow enhanced solid volume multiplied by the component density). A manufactured component may have a larger wall thickness then the schedule requires. To make the enhanced weight calculation more accurate, SCHENCWT can be set to a larger wall thickness schedule. The Enhanced weight calculation is used anytime the WEIGHT column is 0.0 in a data table. The component drawing mode (2D Double line, 2D Single line, 3D Solid, or 3D Enhanced) does not have any effect on the weight calculation. The weight calculation is run in back ground using a temporary 3D enhanced AutoCAD solid when using 2D Double line, 2D Single li ne, or 3D Solid drawing mode. Weights of the following components are based on the AutoCAD Solid geometry when the WEIGHT column is 0.0 in the component data table: PIPE

SCH thickness value used to create AutoCAD solid geometry

ELBOWS


O_LETS


TEES

SCHENCWT thickness value used to create AutoCAD solid geometry

CAPS



174

Property Descriptions CROSSES


LATERALS


REDUCERS SCHENCWT thickness value used to create AutoCAD solid geometry FLANGES

Enhanced Data Table Values used to create AutoCAD solid geometry

Weights of the following components are always based on the Data Table WEIGHT column: COUPLINGS GASKETS BOLTS WELDS SANITARY SPEC_BLIND BLEED_RING EXPANSION JOINTS STRAINERS UNIONS USER_SHAPES VALVES Y_SHAPE PTN - Part Number Value assigned to specific schedules. Custom Data


Thickn ess Tables Properties Table Name

Specifies the name of the table selected. This can be edited. Size Table

Specifies the size table associated with the Thickness Table. This cannot be changed, it is set up when the Thickness Table is created. Schedule Table

Specifies the schedule table associated with the Thickness Table. This cannot be changed, it is set up when the Thickness Table is created.


175

Property Descriptions Version





Fields NOM - Nominal Pipe Size The size of the component from the si ze table. Schedule types The values in this area are schedule table values associated with the thickness table. They represent the weight and thickness of the c omponent.

EndType Tables Properti es The properties for each component within the EndType T ables are all the same. T hey are as follows: Table Name

Specifies the name of the table selected. This can be edited. EndType

Specifies the end type for that particular component. This cannot be edited. Size Table

Specifies the size table associated with the EndT ype Table. This is set up when the EndType is created. Part Number

Specifies the part number associated with that particular component end type. Version






176

Property Descriptions Fields MAINSIZE - Main size Specifies the main sizes used for that end type. OAL - Overall length Specifies the overall length used for that end type. FACELEN - face length Specifies the face length of that end type. CFD - connection face diameter Specifies the connection face diameter for that end type. FFD - face face diameter Specifies the face face diameter for that end type. CHD - connection hub diameter Specifies the connection hub diameter for that end t ype. FHD - face hub diameter Specifies the face hub diameter for that end t ype. PENGLEN - pipe engagement length Specifies the pipe engagement length for that end type. CPENGD - connection pipe engagement diameter Specifies the connection pipe engagement diameter for that end t ype. FPENGD - face pipe engagement diameter Specifies the face pipe engagement diameter for that end t ype. Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 72). You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. Picture Description

Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available.

Examples of Component Endtypes Buttweld

Ferrul e and Ferrule Hub

1. OAL

1. OAL

2. FFD

2. CPENGD = FPENGD

3. PID 4. CFD

3. PENGLEN 4. PID 5. FHD


177

Property Descriptions Flanged

H, I, Q, and Tri -Clamps

1. FFD

1. CFD

2. FACELEN

2. FACELEN 3. PID

3. PID

4. FFD

4. CFD

Socket Engagement

Specifi c Engagement

1. PID

1. OAL

2. OAL

2. PID

3. FHD

Threaded and Socket Weld

Threaded Engagement

1. OAL

1. PENGLEN

2. FHD

2. OAL

3. CPENGD = FPENGD

3. PID

4. PENGLEN 5. PID


178


Data Tables Properties Properties in the data table are broken down b y the specific components, known as a category. Most component properties are similar. This list provides the properties for each category. Properties for each Data Table are listed by type. For more information, see the list of categories below.

Category Properties Name

Specifies the name of the category. Type

Specifies the type of component contained in the category. Description

Specifies a description of the category. List of Categories 

Caps (on page 182)



Couplings (on page 183)



Crosses (on page 185)



Elbows (on page 187)



Flanges (on page 190)



Gaskets/Bolts/Welds (on page 194)



Laterals (on page 201)



O-Lets (on page 202)



Pipe (on page 204)



PipeSupport (on page 206)



Reducers (on page 214)



Sanitary (on page 216)



Spec Blind/Bleed Ring/Exp Joint (on page 218)



Strainers (on page 220)



Tees (on page 222)



Topworks (on page 224)



Unions (on page 226)



User Shapes (on page 228)



Valves (on page 230)



Wye Shape (on page 234)


179


Common Component Properties This list of properties specifies the common properties attached to all components within each category. The rest of the properties are broken down i n their respective category for the component type. Each of the following properties is contained under Component Table in each category. Name

Specifies the specific name of each component based on type and schedule. This c an be changed. Type

Specifies the type of the actual component. This is the common name of the component and cannot be changed. Size Table

Specifies the size table attached to the com ponent. This is based on the si ze table selected when the component was added to the category. This cannot be changed. Part Number

Specifies the part number assigned to that particular component type. Version




Specifies the long description of the com ponent. This includes the common name, the end type, and the weight. This can be changed. Short Description

Specifies the short description of the component. This can be changed. Tag

Specifies the tag of the component. This can be changed.

ETS ETS or Bitwise End Type Placement Control is common to most but not a ll data tables. ETS controls the end type display.


180

Property Descriptions ETS Description In the 2012 legacy program, flanged components such as 45FL, 90FL, CONFL, ECCFL, PIPFL, TEEFL, and YFL use the FLGS variable to control d isplaying of endtype at the ends. This variable is a bitwise flag (0 , 1, 2…) and depends on the numbered connections of the component, as shown in the graphic below.

In the 2013 and later s ystems, the data tables also have an ETS variable ( Endtype bitwise flag) to control display endtypes. This is similar to the legacy FLGS variable, as shown in the graphic below.

When importing, the FLGS variable converts to the ETS variable. Otherwise, a de fault value is set that depends on the number connection of components. For example: the value is 1 for CAPS and 15 for CROSSES. Flanged pipes use special components. PIPFL is a special endtype component, and PIPFL2 is a flanged component. In 2D single mode, the components have d ifferent shapes.


181

Property Descriptions The ETS of PIPFL is a design value of 100, 101, 102, or 103, such as ETS = 103.

The design of PIPFL2 is ETS with a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3, such as ETS = 3

Caps Specifies the caps properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Caps to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to Cap or Plug .

3.

Click the actual data table. Some of the components do not have all properties specified. If a property is not listed for a component, then that component does not use the property.

Default EndType Data Table Setup Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s

Applies the same end type to all ends when this option is set to True. When set to False, the software uses more than one end type. Start

Specifies the start end type associated with that component. This can b e changed. This property sets the default endtype(s) when a new component referencing the associated data table is added to a Project Specification in the New Component pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80).

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. HUBOD - Hub Outside Diameter Specifies the diameter value for the component.


182

Property Descriptions WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Cap

Plug

1. LEN

1. LEN

2.MAINSIZE

2. HUBOD

3. HUBOD

3. REDSIZE

Couplings Specifies the couplings properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Couplings to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a coupling component.

3.

Click the actual data table. Some of the components do not have all properties. If a property is not listed for a component, then that component does not use the property.


183

Property Descriptions Default EndType Data Table Setup Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s


Specifies the start end type associated with that component. This can b e changed. End

Specifies the end end type associated with that component. This can be changed. This property sets the default endtype(s) when a new component referencing the associated data table is added to a Project Specification in the New Component pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80).

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. The reduction property is only available on reducing components. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. HUBOD - Hub Outside Diameter Specifies the diameter value for the component. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



184

Property Descriptions Picture Description

Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Coupling

Coupling Reducing

1. MAINSIZE

1. MAINSIZE

2. LEN

2. LEN

3. HUBOD

3. REDSIZE

Coupling Half

Coupling Nut

1. MAINSIZE

1. HUBOD

2. LEN

2. LEN

3. HUBOD

Crosses Specifies the crosses properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Crosses to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a cross component.

3.



185

Property Descriptions Default Default EndType Data Table Setup Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s

Applies the same end type type to all ends when this option is set to True. When set to False, the software uses more than one end type. Start


Specifies the end end type associated with that component. This can be changed. Branch1

Specifies the first branch end type associated with that component. This c an be changed. Branch2

Specifies the second branch end type associated with that component. This can be changed. This property sets the default endtype(s) when a new component referencing the New Component pane. For associated data table is added to a Project Specification in the New more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) page 80)..

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. The reduction property is only available on reducing components. CENEND1 CENEND1 - Center to Branch 1 End Specifies the distance from the center to an end. CENEND2 CENEND2 - Center to Branch 2 End Specifies the distance from the center to an end. CENEND3 CENEND3 - Center to Branch 3 End Specifies the distance from the center to an end. CENEND4 CENEND4 - Center to Branch 4 End Specifies the distance from the center to an end. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The s oftware calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180) page 180)..


186

Property Descriptions USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique part numbers for each individual component. To insert the Ad d Us er Part USER_PART_NUMBER USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 72) page 72).. You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. Picture Description

Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Cross

Cross Reducing

1. CENEND1

1. CENEND1

2. CENEND2

2. CENEND2

3. CENEND3

3. CENEND3

4. CENEND4

4. CENEND4

5. MAINSIZE

5. MAINSIZE 6. REDSIZE

Elbows Specifies the elbow properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Elbows to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to an elbo w component.

3.


Default Default EndType Data Table Setup Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s

Applies the same end type type to all ends when this option is set to True. When set to False, the software uses more than one end type.


187

Property Descriptions Start

Specifies the start end type associated with that component. This can be changed. End

Specifies the end end type associated with that component. This can be changed. This property sets the default endtype(s) when a new component referencing the New Component pane. For associated data table is added to a Project Specification in the New more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) page 80)..

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. The reduction property is only available on reducing components. RAD - Radius Specifies the radius of the elbow. The t ype of the elbow is determined b y the size of the Radius. For a long-radius elbow, RAD is greater than 1.5 * MAINSIZE. MAINSIZE. For a short-radius elbow, RAD is less than MAINSIZE. The RAD formula that you use should be the same for each row in the RAD column. If they are different, then the software determines the el bow type by the majority (more than 60% of the RAD boxes containing the same formula) of the formulas that you have entered. ANG - Angle Angle Specifies the angle of the elbow. SEGS - Number of Segments Specifies the number of segments on a Mitered Elbo w. SEGS is only available on a Mitered Elbow. STLEN - Start Tangent Length Specifies a tangent length. ETLEN - End Tangent Length Specifies a tangent length. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates pl acement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180) page 180).. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To insert the Ad d Us er Par t USER_PART_NUMBER USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do n ot need the USER_PART_NUMBER USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel .


188

Property Descriptions Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 72) page 72).. You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. Picture Description

Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Elbow (180_BW, (180_BW, 45L_BW, 90L_BW)

Elbow (90L_SR_ (90L_SR_BW, BW, 180_SR_BW)

1. MAINSIZE

1. ANG 2. MAINSIZE

2. RAD

Elbow (45L_SW/TR, 90L_SW/TR)

3. RAD

Reducing Reducing Elbo w

1. RAD

1. REDSIZE

2. MAINSIZE

2. RAD 3. MAINSIZE

3. STLEN 4. ETLEN

Street Street Elbow

Mitered Elbow

1. RAD

1. MAINSIZE

2. MAINSIZE

2. RADIUS 3. ETLEN 4. ANGLE 5. STLEN


189


Flanges Specifies the flanges properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Flanges to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a flange component.

3.


Default Default EndType Data Table Setup Ap pl y s ame en d t yp e to all end s

Applies the same end type type to all ends when this option is set to True. When set to False, the software uses more than one end type. Start


Specifies the end end type associated with that component. This can be changed. This property sets the default endtype(s) when a new component referencing the New Component pane. For associated data table is added to a Project Specification in the New more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) page 80)..

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. The reduction property is only available on reducing components. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. FLGTHK - Flange Thickness Specifies the thickness of the flange. FLGDIA - Flange Diameter Specifies the diameter of the flange. HDLE - HUB Diameter Large End Specifies the diameter of the large end of the flange. HDSE - HUB Diameter Small End Specifies the diameter of the small end of the flange.


190

Property Descriptions PENG - Pipe Engagement Specifies the value of the pipe engagement. PSB - Pipe Set Back Specifies the value of the pipe set back for the flange. Use this property to set the pipe back in the socket weld flange component. LJLEN - Lap Joint Length Specifies the lab joint length for the flange. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel .

Enhancement RFD - Raised Face Diameter Specifies the diameter of the raised face. RFLEN - Raised Face Length Specifies the length of the raised face. BHD - Bolt Hole Diameter Specifies the diameter of the bolt hole. BCD - Bolt Circle Diameter Specifies the diameter of the bolt circle. BHN - Bolt Hole Number Specifies the number of bolt holes. OTD - Orifice Tap Diameter Specifies the diameter of the orifice tab. OTA - Orifice Tap Angle Specifies the angle of the orifice tab. OTN - Orifice Tap Number Specifies the value attached to that specific orifice tab. PID - Pipe Inside Diameter Specifies the diameter of the inside of the pipe. RF - Fillet Radius Specifies the radius of the fillet.


191



Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Flange Blind

Flange Lap Joi nt

1. BHD

1. HDLE=HDSE

2. RFLEN

2. PID

3 and 4. FLGTHK = LEN,

3. FLGTHK 4. RFLEN 5. RFD

5. RFD

6. BCD

6. BCD

7. FLGDIA

7. FLGDIA

8. LEN 9. BHD Long Weld Neck


Flange Weld Neck

1. HDLE

1. HDLE

2. HDSE

2. HDSE

3. PID

3. PID

4. FLGTHK

4. FLGTHK

5. RFLEN

5. RFLEN

6. RFD

6. RFD

7. BCD

7. BCD

8. FLGDIA

8. FLGDIA

9. LEN

9. LEN

10. BHD

10. BHD

192

Property Descriptions Flange Reducing Slip On

Flange Reducing Threaded

1. HDLE

1. HDLE

2. HDSE

2. HDSE

3. PENG

3. PENG

4. PSB

4. PSB

5. LEN

5. FLGTHK

6. PID

6. RFLEN

7. RFD

7. PID

8. BCD

8. RFD

9. FLGDIA

9. BCD

10. RFLEN

10. FLGDIA

11. FLGTHK

11. LEN

12. BHD

12. BHD

Flange Reducing Weld Neck

Flange Slip On

1. HDLE

1. HDLE

2. HDSE

2. HDSE

3. PID

3. PENG

4. FLGTHK

4. PSB

5. RFLEN

5. FLGTHK

6. RFD

6. RFLEN

7. BCD

7. PID

8. FLGDIA

8. RFD

9. LEN

9. BCD

10. BHD

10. FLGDIA 11. LEN 12. BHD


193

Property Descriptions Flange Socket Weld

Flange Threaded

1. HDLE 2. HDSE 3. PENG 4. PSB 5. LEN 6. PID 7. RFD 8. BCD 9. FLGDIA 10. RFLEN

1. HDLE = HDSE 2. MAINSIZE 3. LEN 4. RFD 5. BCD 6. FLGDIA 7. RFLEN 8. FLGTHK 9. BHD

11. FLGTHK 12. BHD Stub

1. HDLE 2. HDSE 3. PIPETHK 4. FLGTHK 5. FLGDIA 6. LEN

Gaskets/Bolts/Welds Specifies the gasket, bolt, and weld properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Gaskets/Bolds/Welds to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a weld, gasket, or bolt.

3.



194

Property Descriptions Gaskets Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. FLGOD - Flange Outside Diameter Specifies the outside diameter of a flange for a gasket. THK - Thickness Specifies the thickness of a gasket. RNO - Ring Number Specifies the ring number of a gask et. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. INSIDEDIAMETER - Inside Diameter Specifies the inside diameter of the gask et. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Gasket

1. MAINSIZE 2. THCK 3. FLGOD


195

Property Descriptions Bolts Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. NOSET - Number of bolts in set Specifies the amount of bolts for a set of flanges or connections. DIA - Bolt Diameter Specifies the diameter of a bolt. LEN - Length Specifies the length of a bolt. TYPE - Bolt Type Specifies the bolt type. NUTCNT - Nut Count Specifies the number of nuts per bolt. NUTTHK - Nut Thickness Specifies the thickness of the nut associated with the bolt. EXT - Bolt Extension Specifies the extension of the bolt. TOL - Tolerance Specifies the tolerance of the bolt and used to round the bolt length after calculation. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. If the bolt Weight equals 0.0 in the Stud Bolts data table, the software calculates the weight using the Density value from the Material Table and the AutoCAD solid volume of the whole set of bolts. 

If the bolt Weight is greater than 0.0 for flange-to-flange components, then the software assigns the weight to the bolt set without performing any other calculations. However, when there is a component between the flanges, such as a bleed ring, the software uses the Densit y and solid volume calculation.

WASHERTHK - Washer Thickness Specifies the thickness of the washer on a bolt. WASHERCNT - W asher Count Specifies the number of washers per bolt. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel .


196




Bolt Length Calculation Bolt Type = 0: Fixed Length Bolt

CADWorx does not calculate bolt lengths for type 0 bolts. Bolt Type = 1: 1 - Thread 2 - Nut 3 - Runout

4 - Shank 5 - Radius 6 - Head 7 - Thread Length 8 - Grip Length 9 - Nominal Length Bolt Type = 2: wit h bolt extension

1 - Nuts 2 - Thread 3 - Nominal Length 4 - Bolt Extension


197

Property Descriptions Nut Count

Nut count = 1, Washer count = 0



Bolt Length Formula

Bolt Type = 1: BOLT LEN = Round (X + Nut Count * Nut Thick ness + Bolt extension + Number Washer * Washer Thickness) Bolt Type = 2: BOLT LEN = Round (X + Nut Count * Nut Thick ness + 2 * Bolt extension + Number Washer * Washer Thickness) The bolt length = maximum of (BOLT LEN, Length in the data table).


198

Property Descriptions Where X is:

The round function works with the BoltRoundControl setting. BoltRoundControl specifies the rounding of bolt length: 

0 - No rounding is performed.



1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Tolerance.



2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Tolerance.



3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Tolerance.

If the bolt Weight equals 0.0 in the Stud Bolts data table, the software calculates the weight using the Density value from the Material Table and the AutoCAD solid volume of the whole set of bolts. If the bolt Weight is greater than 0.0 for flange-to-flange components, then the software assigns the weight to the bolt set without performing any other calculations. However, when there is a component between the flanges, such as a bleed ring, the software uses the Density and solid volume calculation. Bolt Flanges

Two flange components are required, with optional gaskets and components. Components in the middle must have a wafer end t ype on both ends. Two components are allowed.

1 - Bleed ring 2 - Spectacle blind


199

Property Descriptions Welds Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. THK - Thickness Specifies the thickness of a weld. TYPE - Type Specifies the type of weld. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. PENETRATION - Penetration Specifies the penetration value of the weld. REINFORCEMENTOUTSIDE - Reinforcement Outside Specifies the outside reinforcement of the weld. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Weld

1. Thickness


200


Laterals Specifies the laterals properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Laterals to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a lateral component.

3.






Specifies the branch end type associated with that co mponent. This can be changed. This property sets the default endtype(s) when a new component referencing the associated data table is added to a Project Specification in the New Component pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80).

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. The reduction option is only available on reducing components. CSEND - Center to Small End Specifies the small center end. CLEND - Center to Large End Specifies the large center end. CBRH - Center to Branch Specifies the center branch. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component.


201

Property Descriptions ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement c ontrol using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Lateral

Lateral Reducing

1. CBRH

1. CBRH

2. MAINSIZE

2. REDSIZE

3. CSEND

3. MAINSIZE

4. CLEND

4. CLEND 5. CSEND

O-Lets Specifies the o-lets properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to O-Lets to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to an o-let component.

3.



202


Applies the same end type to all ends when this option is set to True. When set to False, the software uses more than one end type. End


Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. PSA - Pipe Sizes Allowed Specifies the pipe size allowed for the O-let. HUBOD - HUB Outside Diameter Specifies the outside diameter of the O-let. PROJ - Outside Projection Specifies the projection from the outer point. OLETANGLE - Olet Angle Specifies the angle of the O-let. PENG - Pipe Engagement Specifies the pipe engagement of the O-let. PSB - Pipe Set Back Specifies the set back of the pipe from the end point. POD - Pipe Outside Diameter Specifies the outside diameter of the pipe. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates pl acement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Ad d Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel .


203



Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Elbow-O-Let

Nip-O-Let

1. HUBOD

1. PROJ

2. PROJ

2. SOCTHR 3. HUBOD 4. PSA

O-Let Lateral-O-Let

Pipe Specifies the pipe properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Pipe to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a pipe component.

3.



Applies the same end type to all ends when this option is set to True. When set to False, the software uses more than one end type.


204




Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. MINLEN - Optional Minimum Pipe Length Specifies the optional minimum lengths for the component. MAXLEN - Optional Maximum Pipe Length Specifies the optional maximum lengths for the component. THRDCL - Threaded close length Specifies the length of a threaded close for a nipple. SOCCL - Socket close length Specifies the length of a socket close for a nipple. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



205


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Pipe

1. MAXLEN 2. MINLEN 3. MAINSIZE

Nipple

PipeSupport Specifies the pipe support properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to PipeSuppor t to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to pipe support.

3.

Click the actual data table. Some of the components do not have all properties specified. If a property is not listed for a pipe support, then that support does not use the property. In the list below, some descriptions contain specific support names because they are o nly available with those supports.

Show Optional

Specifies how the variable length can be selected in the Pipe Support Data dialog box. This property appears under the Component Table list, but is unique to the PipeSupport data table. For more information on the Pipe Support Data dialog box, see Support Modeler Palette in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. 

0

Specifies that the components in the Pipe Support Data dialog box use the default data in the Data Table. 

1

Specifies that you can select specific sizes for the components of a pipe support in the Pipe Support Data dialog box. The sizes listed are based on the size of the support already selected. If duplicate sizes are available, they are listed here. Click the ellipsis under Data Table to make this selection. 

2

Specifies that you can select all si zes for the components of a pipe s upport in the Pipe Support Data dialog box. All sizes for parts available in the data table are listed when this option is selected. Click the ellipsis under Data Table to make this selection.


206

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. MAXPIPEOD - Max Pipe Outside Diameter Specifies the maximum outside diameter for a pipe resting on a support. This is only available for the Clevis Hanger V Bott om . LENGTH1 - Length1 Specifies length one of the pipe support. LENGTH2 - Length2 Specifies length two of the pipe support. BOLTOD - Bolt OD Specifies the outside diameter of the bolt on the Ubolt support. LEGLENGTH - Leg Length Specifies the leg length on the Ubolt support. EXTENSION - Extension Specifies the extension of the strap. DROP - Drop Specifies the drop of the pipe support. GAP - Gap Specifies the gap of the pipe support. THK - Thickness Specifies the thickness of the pipe support. WIDTH - Width Specifies the width of the horizontal pipe clamp. NUMBEROFBOLT1 - Number Of Bolt1 Specifies the value of bolt one on the pipe clamps. BOLTDIAMETER1 - Bolt1 Diameter Specifies the diameter of bolt one on the horizontal pipe clamp. BOLTLENGTH1 - Bolt1 Length Specifies the length of bolt one on the horizontal pipe clamp. NUMBEROFBOLT2 - Number Of Bolt2 Specifies the value of bolt two on the pipe clamps. BOLTDIAMETER2 - Bolt2 Diameter Specifies the diameter of bolt one on the horizontal pipe clamp.


207

Property Descriptions BOLTLENGTH2 - Bolt2 Length Specifies the length of bolt one on the horizontal pipe clamp. BOLTSET - Bolt Set Specifies the value for the bolt set on the horizontal pipe clamp. SUBDIRECTORY - Sub Directory Specifies the location of the custom support folder. Sub Directory is only available in the Custom category. The subdirectory automatically defaults to the Spec folder located in [Product Folder]\Plant. You can use folders that you create in the C:\[Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder in the SUBDIRECTORY value. If you need to use a folder location outside of the default Spec folder, then you must type the entire path of the l ocal or network folder location in the SUBDIRECTORY value. For example, type Z:\[Name of custom drawing folder\[Name of custom support folder] in the SUBDIRECTORY value for the local location or \\[Network Name]\[Name of custom drawing folder]\[Name of custom support folder] for a network location. DWGNAME - Drawing Name Specifies the drawing name of the support. SCALE - Scale Specifies the scale of the pi pe support. ROTATION - Rotation Specifies the direction of the support. CLAMPWEBTHK - Clamp Web Thickness Specifies the thickness for the clamp web. CLAMPDEPTH - Clamp Depth Specifies the depth of the beam c lamp. CLAMPTHK - Clamp Thickness Specifies the thickness of the beam clamp. CLAMPWIDTH - Clamp Width Specifies the width of the beam clamp. BEAMFLGWIDTH - Beam FLG Width Specifies the width of the beam flange. BEAMFLGTHK - Beam FLG Thickness Specifies the thickness of the beam flange. BEAMWEBTHK - Beam Web Thickness Specifies the thickness of the beam web. LFB - Length From Bottom Specifies the length from the bottom of the clevis hanger types.


208

Property Descriptions LFC - Length From Center Specifies the length from the center of the clevis and swivel ring hanger types. UPPERTHK - Upper Thickness Specifies the upper thickness of the clevis ha nger types. UPPERWIDTH - Upper Width Specifies the upper width of the clevis h anger types. LOWERTHK - Lower Thickness Specifies the lower thickness of the clevis hanger types. LOWERWIDTH - Lower Width Specifies the lower width of the clevis hanger types. UPPERLENGTH - Upper Length Specifies the upper length of the cle vis and swivel ring hanger t ypes. UPPERHEIGHT - Upper Height Specifies the upper height of the cle vis hanger types. NUMBEROFBOLT - Number Of Bolt Specifies the number of bolts on the s upport. BOLTDIAMETER - Bolt Diameter Specifies the diameter of the bolt on the support. BOLTLENGTH - Bolt Length Specifies the length of the bolt on the support. WEBHEIGHT - W eb Height Specifies the height of the web on the pipe shoe support. WEBTHK - Web Thickness Specifies the thickness of the web on the pipe shoe support. FLANGETHK - Flange Thickness Specifies the thickness of the flange on the pipe shoe support. FLANGEWIDTH - Flange Width Specifies the width of the flange on the pipe show support. DISTANCEWEB Distance Web Specifies the web distance on the pipe shoe support. IBHX - Insulation Band Hole X Specifies the X insulation band hole on the pipe shoe support. IBHY - Insulation Band Hole Y Specifies the Y insulation band hole on the pipe shoe support.


209

Property Descriptions IBHD - Insulation Band Hole D Specifies the D insulation band hole o n the pipe shoe support. IBHTOP - Insulation Band Hole Top Specifies the top insulation band hole on the pipe shoe support. PLATEBW - End Plate Bottom Width Specifies the width of the bottom end plate on the pipe shoe support. PLATETW - End Plate Top Width Specifies the width of the top end plate on the pipe shoe support. PLATEOY - End Plate Offset From Bottom Specifies the offset from the bottom for the end plate on the pipe shoe support. PLATEOX - End Plate Offset From Side Specifies the offset from the side for the end plate on the pipe shoe su pport. ANGLE - Angle The angle of the pipe cl amp. For 90 degrees create a hanger p ipe clamp. For 0 degrees create a horizontal pipe clamp. SUPPORTOD - Support OD Specifies the outside diameter of the pipe support. WALLTHK - Wall Thickness Specifies the thickness of the pipe support. LENGTH - Length Specifies the length of the pipe support. DIAMETER - Diameter Specifies the diameter of the rod and spring hanger supports. WIDTH - Width Specifies the width of the pipe support. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight of the support. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data

Enables you to input fields using the New Field Dialog Box (on page 72). You can access the custom data fields in CADWorx Plant through the Component Edit dialog box. For more information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box and Local Edit in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide. For more information, see Pipe Support Assembly and Component Properties (on page 169).


210

Property Descriptions Picture Description - Displays a 2D image of the component.

Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Beam Clamp

Clevis Hanger Flat Top

1. BEAM FLANGE THK

1. UPPER WIDTH 2. UPPER THK

2. BEAM FLANGE WIDTH

3. BOLT DIAMETER 4. LFB

3. BEAM WEB THK

5. LOWER THK

4. CLAMP THK

6. 3 x BOLT DIAMETER

5.CLAMP DEPTH

7.LOWER WIDTH

6. CLAMP WEB THK 7.CLAMP WIDTH Clevis Hanger

Clevis Hanger V Bott om

1. UPPER WIDTH 2. UPPER HEIGHT 3. UPPER LENGTH 4. UPPER THK 5.BOLT DIAMETER 6. LFC 7. MAIN SIZE 8. LOWER THK 9. 3 x BOLT DIAMETER 10. LOWER WIDTH


1. UPPER WIDTH 2. UPPER HEIGHT 3. UPPER THK 4. UPPER LENGTH 5. LFB 6. 3 x BOLT DIAMETER 7. MAIN SIZE 8. MAX OD 9. BOLT DIAMETER 10. LOWER THK 11. LOWER WIDTH

211

Property Descriptions Custom

Pipe Clamp

1. WIDTH 2. THK 3. LENGTH1 4. LENGTH2 5. GAP 6. MAIN SIZE

Pipe

Pipe Shoe

1. SUPPORT OD

1. LENGTH 2. FLANGE THK

2. LENGTH

3. WEB THK

3. WALL THK

4. FLANGE WIDTH 5. WEB HEIGHT

Plate

Rod

1. WIDTH

1. DIAMETER

2. LENGTH

2. LENGTH

3. THK


212

Property Descriptions Saddle

Split Ring Hanger

1. THK

1. WIDTH

2. MAIN SIZE

2. GAP

3. DROP

3. MAIN SIZE

4. LENGTH1

4. BOLD DIAMETER

5. LENGTH2

5. THK

6. WIDTH

Spring Hanger

Strap

1. LENGTH

1. WIDTH

2. DIAMETER

2. EXTENSION 3. THK 4. LENGTH1 5. LENGTH2 6. GAP 7. MAIN SIZE

Swivel Ring Hanger

UBolt

1. WIDTH

1. LEG LENGTH

2. UPPER LENGTH

2. BOLT OD 3. MAIN SIZE

3. LFC 4. MAIN SIZE 5. THK


213


Reducers Specifies the reducer's properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Reducers to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a reducer component.

3.






Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. The reduction property is only available on reducing components. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. CENOFF - Center Lines Offset Specifies the offset of the center line. SESLEN - Small End Straight Length Specifies the straight length of the small end of the reducer. LESLEN - Large End Straight Length Specifies the straight length of the large end of the reducer. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component.


214

Property Descriptions ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement c ontrol using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Bushing

Concentric / Swage Concentric

1. LEN

1. MAINSIZE

2. MAINSIZE

2. LESLEN

3. REDSIZE

3. LEN 4. SESLEN 5. REDSIZE

Eccentric / Swage Eccentric

1. MAINSIZE 2. LESLEN 3. LEN 4. SESLEN 5. REDSIZE 6. CENOFF


215


Sanitary Specifies the sanitary properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Sanitary to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a sanitary com ponent.

3.






Specifies the branch end type associated with that component. This can be changed. This property sets the default endtype(s) when a new component referencing the associated data table is added to a Project Specification in the New Component pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80).

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. The reduction property is only available on reducing components. RAD - Radius Specifies the radius of the uben. ANG - Angle Specifies the angle of the uben. STLEN - Start Straight Length Specifies the distance from the start port to the start of the curve. ENLEN - End Straight Length Specifies the distance from the end port to the start of the curve.


216

Property Descriptions PROJ - Side to project branch Specifies the distance from the side to the projection branch. BRANPROJ - Branch projection Specifies the distance from the centerline of the bend to the end of branch projecti on. ACTLG - Actuator length Specifies the length of the actuator. ACTOD - Actuator outside diameter Specifies the outside diameter of the actuator. YOKELG - Yoke length Specifies the length of the yoke for a multi-port. CENCEN - Center to center ports Specifies the distance from the center to the center of ports. CENPORT - Center to port Specifies the distance from the center to the port. CENSTEM - Center to stem Specifies the distance from the center to the stem. Body Type - Expand for information on Body 1, Body 2, and Body 3. BODY1 - Body 1 - Specifies the component drawn for body 1 based off the image below. Values entered can be from 1 to 9. BODY2 - Body 2 - Specifies the component drawn for body 2 based off the image below. Values entered can be from 1 to 9. BODY3 - Body 3 - Specifies the component drawn for body 3 based off the image below. Values entered can be from 1 to 9.


217

Property Descriptions ANGLE1 - Angle 1 Specifies the angle of the branch from the m ain line of the valve. ANGLE2 - Angel 2 Specifies the angle of the branch from the m ain line of the valve. ANGLE3 - Angle 3 Specifies the angle of the branch from the main line of the valve. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



Spec Blind/Bleed Ring/Exp Join t Specifies the spectacle blind, bleed ring, and expansion joint properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Spec Blind/Bleed Ring/Exp Joint to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a spectacle blind, bleed ring, or expansion joint.

3.





218




Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. FLGOD - Flange Outside Diameter Specifies the outside diameter of a flange for a bleed ring, expansion joint, or spectacle blind. THK - Thickness Specifies the thickness of a gasket or a weld. CCOAL - Center to Center / Overall Length Specifies the center to center distance or the overall l ength of the component. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



219


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Bleed Ring

Expansion Joint

1. FLGOD

1. THK

2. THK

2. FLGOD 3. CCOAL 4. MAINSIZE

Spectacle Blin d

1. FLGOD 2. THK 3. CCOAL

Strainers Specifies the strainers properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Strainers to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a strainer component.

3.





220




Specifies the branch end type associated with that component. This can be changed. This property sets the default endtype(s) when a new component referencing the associated data table is added to a Project Specification in the New Compo nent pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80).

Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. CENBTM - Center to Branch End Specifies the distance from the center to the extreme bottom of the c omponent. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



221


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Strainer

1. CENBTM 2. MAINSIZE

Tees Specifies the tees properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Tees to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a tee component.

3.


To view the properties listed in this topic, click the plus + sign next to Tees . The category opens and you need to click a plus + sign next to a tee group. Next, click the actual data table. Some of the components do not have some of the following properties. If a property is not listed when clicking on a particular component that component doe s not use that particular property.







222

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduce Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. Only available on reducing components. CMAIN - Center to End 1 Specifies the distance from the center to the main end. CEND - Center to End 2 Specifies the distance from the center to the end end. CBRH - Center to Branch End Specifies the distance from the center to the branch end. WEIGHT - Weight - Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The s oftware calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Tee

Tee Reducin g

1. MAINSIZE

1. MAINSIZE

2. CMAIN

2. CMAIN

3. CEND

3. CEND

4. CBRH

4. CBRH 5. REDSIZE


223


Topworks Specifies the topworks properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Topworks to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a topworks component.

3.


Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. OPOR - Operator Outside Radius Specifies the radius from the center to the outside of the actuator wheel. OPTHK - Operator Thickness Specifies the thickness of the operator wheel. OPLENGTH - Operator Length Specifies the length of the operator stem. HANDLEOR - Handle Bar Outside Radius Specifies the outside radius of the handle. HANDLELENGTH - Handle Length Specifies the length of the handle to operate the valve. SUBDIRECTORY - Sub Directory Specifies the location of the custom topwork folder. Sub Directory is only available in the Custom category. The subdirectory automatically defaults to the Spec folder located in [Product Folder]\Plant. You can use folders that you create in the C:\[Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder in the SUBDIRECTORY value. If you need to use a folder location outside of the default Spec folder, then you must type the entire path of the l ocal or network folder location in the SUBDIRECTORY value. For example, type Z:\[Name of custom drawing folder\[Name of custom topwork folder] in the SUBDIRECTORY value for the local location or \\[Network Name]\[Name of custom drawing folder]\[Name of custom topwork folder] for a network location. DWGNAME - Drawing Name Specifies the drawing name of the topwork. ROTATION - Rotation Specifies the direction of the topwork. LEFTOR - Left Outside Radius Specifies the left outside radius.


224

Property Descriptions LEFTLENGTH - Left Side Length Specifies the left side length of the topwork. This property is only on a topwork that has sides. RIGHTOR - Right Outside Radius Specifies the right outside radius of the topwork RIGHTLENGTH - Right Side Length Specifies the right length side of the topwork. This property is only on a topwork that has sides. NODERADIUS - Node Radius Specifies the radius of the node. T his property is only on a topwork that contains a node. GEARBT - Gear Bottom to Stem Bottom Specifies the distance from the top of the stem to the bottom of the stem. WHEELBT - Gear Top to Gear Bottom Specifies the distance from the top of the g ear box to the top of the stem. WHEELFT - Stem to Wheel Distance Specifies the distance of the wheel to the stem. WHEELOR - Wheel Outside Radius Specifies the outside radius of the wheel. WHEELLENGTH - Wheel Length Specifies the length of the wheel. SPOKENUMBER - Number of Spokes Specifies the number of spokes on the wheel. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. Custom Data


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Ac tu ato r

Gear1

1. OPOR

1. WHEELFT

2. OPOR/2

2. 2*OPTHK

3. MAINSIZE

3. OPTHK

4. OPLENGTH

4. WHEELOR 5. GEARBT 6. WHEELBT 7. OPLENGTH


225

Property Descriptions Gear2

GearActuator

1. 2*NODERADIUS

1. 2*OPOR 2. OPLENGTH

2. RIGHTLENGTH

3. GEARBT

3. OPTHK

4. WHEELLENGTH

4. OPLENGTH 5. 2*OPOR 6. LEFTLENGTH

Lever1

Lever2

1. HANDLENGHT

1. HANDLENGHT

2. OPLENGTH

2. 2*HANDOR

3. 2*OPOR

3. 2*OPOR

4. 2*HANDOR

4. OPLENGTH 5. OPTHK

Wheel

1. OPOR/5 2. 2*OPTHK 3. OPLENGTH 4. MAINSIZE 5. OPOR

Unions Specifies the union's properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Unions to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a union component.

3.



226





Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component. NUTCRNS - Nut Crown distance Specifies the distance of the nut crown. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



227


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Union

1. NUTCRNS 2. LEN 3. MAINSIZE

User Shapes Specifies the user shapes properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to User Shapes to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a user sha pe component.

3.


Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. TYPE - Type Specifies the type of user shape. SUBDIRECTORY - Sub Directory Specifies the location of the user shapes fol der. The subdirectory for user shapes does not require a value. User shapes automatically store in the Spec folder located in [Product Folder]\Plant if you do not specify a subdirectory. You can use folders that you create in the C:\[Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder in the SUBDIRECTORY value. If you need to use a f older location outside of the default Spec folder, then you must type the entire path of the l ocal or network folder location in the SUBDIRECTORY value. For example, type Z:\[Name of custom drawing folder]\[Name of user shape folder] in the SUBDIRECTORY value for a local location. For a network location type \\[Network Name]\[Name of custom drawing folder]\[Name of user shape folder] . This path must be the same as the one you set for the folder under Folder settings in the Define User Shape dialog box in CADWorx Plant. For more information, see User Shapes in the CADWorx Plant Users Guide.


228

Property Descriptions DWG3DSOLID - Drawing Name for 3D Solid m ode Specifies the drawing name you gave the user shape when you created it. DWG2DDOUBLE - Drawing Name for 2D Double Line mode Specifies the drawing name given to the user shape when it was created. DWG2DSINGLE - Drawing Name for 2D Single Line m ode Specifies the drawing name given to the user shape when it was created. CONNPOINT - Connection points Specifies the value of the user shapes connection points. REFPOINT - Reference points Specifies the value of the reference connection points for the user shape. CONNDIRECT - Direction of each connection Specifies the value of the direction for the connection points of the user shape. CONNREDUCER - Reduction settings for each connection Specifies the value for the reducing connections flags. CONNENDTYPE - End type at each connection Specifies the value for the connection points e ndtypes. PROFILEPOINT - Array profile points Specifies the user shapes profile points if there are any. DENSITY - Density Specifies the density of the user shape. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. LENGTH - Length Specifies the length for the component. USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique part numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Ad d Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of c omponents available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available.


229


Valves Specifies the valves properties. To view the properties: 1.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Valves to expand the category.

2.

Click a plus (+) sign next to a valve c omponent.

3.







Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the component. The reduction property is only available on reducing components. HUBOD - Hub Outside Diameter Specifies the diameter value for the component. ODIN - Outside Diameter Inlet Specifies the outside diameter of the inlet. SQ - Square Dimension Specifies the square dimensions of the valve. LEN - Length Specifies the lengths for the component.


230

Property Descriptions OAL - Overall length Specifies the overall length of the component. ENDPORT - End to port outlet Specifies the distance from the end to the p ort outlet. CENFEMALE - Center to Female End Specifies the distance from the center to the female en d. CPRES - Center to pressure end Specifies the distance from the center to the pressure end. ODPRES - Outside Diameter Pressure End Specifies the outside diameter of the pressure end. CREL - Center to relief end Specifies the distance from the center to the relief end. ODREL - Outside Diameter Relief End Specifies the outside diameter of the relief end. CMAIN - Center to End 1 Specifies the distance from the center to the main end. CEND - Center to End 2 Specifies the distance from the center to the end e nd. CBRH - Center to Branch End Specifies the distance from the center to the branch end. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates placement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To i nsert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data



231


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. 3-Way Valve

4-Way Valve

1. HUBOD

1. HUBOD

2. CMAIN

2. CMAIN

3. CEND

3. CBRH

4. CBRH

An gl e Valv e

Ball Valve

1. ODPRES

1. MAINSIZE

2. CPRES

2. LENGTH

3. CREL

3. HUBOD

4. ODREL

Butterfly Valve


Check Valve

1. HUBOD

1. HUBOD

2. LENGTH

2. LENGTH

232

Property Descriptions Control Valve

Dual Check Valve

1. HUBOD

1. HUBOD

2. LENGTH

2. LENGTH

Diaphragm Valve

Xbody Gate Valve

1. HUBOD

1. MAINSIZE

2. LENGTH

2. CENFEMALE 3. OAL 4. HUBOD

Gage Valve

Gate Valve

1. MAINSIZE

1. HUBOD 2. LENGTH

2. ENDPORT 3. OAL 4. SQ

Globe Valve

Needle Valve

1. MAINSIZE

1. HUBOD 2. LENGTH

2. LENGTH


233

Property Descriptions Plug Valve

Relief Valve

1. HUBOD

1. CPRES

2. LENGTH

2. ODPRES 3. ODREL 4. CREL

Rotary Valve

1. HUBOD 2. LENGTH

Wye Shape Specifies the wye shape properties. To view the properties: 1. 2. 3.

Click the plus (+) sign next to Wye Shape to expand the category. Click a plus (+) sign next to a wye shape component. Click the actual data table. Some of the components do not have all properties. If a property is not listed for a component, then that component does not use the property.


Applies the same end type to all ends when this option is set to True. When set to False, the software uses more than one end type. Start Specifies the start end type associated with that component. This can b e changed. End Specifies the end end type associated with that component. This can be changed. Branch1 Specifies the branch end type associated with that component. This can be changed.

This property sets the default endtype(s) when a new component referencing the associated data table is added to a Project Specification in the New Component pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80).


234

Property Descriptions Required MAINSIZE - Main Size Specifies the main sizes for the component. CMAIN - Center to End 1 Specifies the center main to the end of the wye. CEND - Center to Branch 1 End Specifies the center of the first branch to the e nd of the wye. CBRH - Center to Branch 2 End Specifies the center of the second branch to the end of the wye. WEIGHT - Weight Specifies the weight for the component. ETS - Bitwise End Type Placement Control Specifies the value for the placement control. The software calculates pl acement control using the end type number for each port. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180). USER_PART_NUMBER - User Part Number Enables you to specify unique p art numbers for each individual component. To insert the USER_PART_NUMBER field, right-click the data table, and then select Add Us er Par t Number Column . You can also accomplish this by double-clicking Custom Data in the Properties pane and creating the USER_PART_NUMBER field exactly as it appears here. If you do not need the USER_PART_NUMBER column, click Cancel . Custom Data


Displays a 2D image of the component. Listed below are the types of components available for selection in the table. Images are provided when available. Wye

1. CBRH 2. CEND 3. CMAIN 4. MAINSIZE


235


IndexCode Tables Properti es Table Name






Fields INDEXCODE - Index Code Specifies the index code for a specific component. Index codes are associated with the database code property INDEXCODE. For more information, see DBCode Tables Properties (on page 236). DESCRIPTION - Description The description of the component associated with the index code. COMPTYPE - Component Type Specifies the component type associated with the index code. Custom Data


DBCode Tables Properti es Table Name


Specifies the Spec Editor version. This cannot be edited. IndexCode Table

Specifies the IndexCode Table selected when creating a DBCode table. This cannot be edited. Created By

Specifies the person who created the project. This can be edited. Edited By

Specifies the person who edited the project. This can be edited.


236

Property Descriptions Description


Fields INDEXCODE - Index Code Specifies the index code associated with the sel ected database code table. DESCRIPTION - Description Specifies the description of the component associated with the index code in the INDEXCODE field. MAINSIZE - Main size Specifies the main sizes used for the specific index code and description. REDSIZE - Reduction Size Specifies the reduction sizes for the specific index code and description. PTN - Part Number Specifies the part number assigned to a s pecific index code row. When a d atabase code is imported, the part numbers that display contain the PTN designation, the index code, and an ascending numeric value. Custom Data


End Prep Tables Properti es Table Name

Specifies the name of the table selected. You can edit this property. Default Part Number

Specifies the default part number assigned to the table. You can edit this property. The default is 001 and auto-populated by the Specification Editor. Version




Specifies the description of the table. You can edit this property.


237

Property Descriptions Fields NAME Specifies the name of the end preparation. The name is an abbreviation of the description. DESCRIPTION Specifies the description of the end preparation. The description is the long description of the name. PTN Specifies the part number for the end preparation. Custom Data



238

A P P E N D I X B

Update History Items added and up dated wit h CADWorx Spec Editor 2015 SP1: Software Enhancements 



Enhanced the import of the Smart Plant Reference Data (SPRD) specifications. This enhancement now includes importing the Ident , Short , and Option codes when the SPRD specification includes those codes. For more information, see Import Specification From SPRD File (on page 103). When SPRD specifications include the unit basis applicable to the specification contents, then the CADWorx Specification Editor SPRD import automatically sets the conversion units accordingly. SPRD specification unit basis was not previously available in the SPRD specification files. Previously, you were required to specify the uni t basis for the conversion manually. The SPRD import now only requires you to specify the unit basis when the SPRD specification source file does not contain the re levant unit details. For more information, see Import Specification From SPRD File (on page 103).


Improved instructions for displaying the bolt length and bolt diameter part numbers in CADWorx. These instructions detail a workflow from the catalog, to the project, and then to the drawing. This procedure allows you to disp lay the part numbering of the bolt lengths and the bolt diameters. For more information, see Display the bolt diameter part number in CADWorx Plant (on page 35), and Display the bolt length part number in CADWorx Plant (on page 37).

Items added and updated wi th CADWorx Spec Editor 2015: Software Enhancements 





You can now add bolt length tables and bolt diameter tables to the Size Tables folder by clicking Bolt Diameter Table or Bolt Length Table in the Add Tabl e panel on the Home tab, or by using the right-click options Add B ol t Diam eter Tabl e and Add B ol t L eng th Table. For more information, see Add Table Panel (on page 25), Edit table features (on page 26), Bolt Diameter Table (on page 32), Add a new bolt diameter table (on page 33), Bolt Length Table (on page 35), and Add a new bolt length table (on page 36). You can now select the bolt length and bolt diameter tables in the Specification Properties. For more information, see Specification Properties (on page 163). You can now add end prep tables to the Miscellaneous folder with the right-click option Ad d En d Pr ep Tab le or from End Prep Table on the Ad d Tab le panel. For more information, see Add Table Panel (on page 25), End Prep Table (on page 54), Add a new end prep table (on page 55), Edit end prep table (on page 56), Miscellaneous folder (on page 72), and End Prep Tables Properties (on page 237).


239

Update History 



















You can now select the end prep table in the Specification Properties . For more information, see Specification Properties (on page 163) page 163).. and Edit Compo nent You can now select the Isogen symbol for end types in the the New and Pane. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) page 80) and and Add single new component to a spec (on page 89) page 89)..

You can now use the index code tables in your long, short, tag, tag, and part number description formats. For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139) page 139) and and Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) page 86).. You can now add custom custom data and property property details details to your pipe pipe support components in in Support Component of the Properties . For more information, see Pipe Support Assembly and Component Properties (on page 169) page 169).. You can now select Straight Tee/Cross + Reducer in in the branch table. Select Straight Tee/Cross Tee/Cross + Redu Redu cer to to insert crosses and tees based on the size of the branch. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) page 80).. You can create a pull-down list of items for custom custom data. For more information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 72) page 72) and and List Items Dialog Box (on page 74) page 74).. You can now use spaces and underscores underscores in the description description formats. For more information, information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139) page 139).. Temperature Rating , and Pressure Rating Rating s for You can now add Component Class , Temperature Start , End , Branch 1, and Branch 2 end points for Valves. For more information, see New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) page 80)..

You can now use the OD_RED_SIZ_TBL and the DESCRIPTION_CMP_TBL schemas in the Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139) page 139).. Improved import of of AutoCAD AutoCAD Plant 3D specifications and catalogs. For more information, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data (on page 98) page 98),, Import a single specification using an AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog (on page 100) page 100),, Import a single specification using a CADWorx catalog (on page 101) page 101),, and Import multiple specifications using a CADWorx catalog (on page 102) page 102)..



Pa rt Num ber Col um n message box. You can now cancel the Ad d Us er Part



Improved the load time of the description format dialog boxes.


Added the bolt length and bolt diameter diameter properties properties to the properties properties descriptions. descriptions. For more information, see Specification Properties (on page 163) page 163),, Bolt Diameter Table Properties (on page 171) page 171),, and Bolt Length Table Properties (on page 172) page 172)..

Items added and up dated wit h CADWorx Spec Editor 2014 2014 SP1: SP1: Software Enhancements 

You can now decide if your model receives custom data data information information using the At tac h Fi eld to Components check box in the New Field dialog box. For m ore information, see New Field Dialog Box (on page 72) page 72)..



Spec Editor now retains the window size.



O-Let groups groups are split, so that the long description for each O-Let now reads correctly.


240

Update History 

You can now use size table custom custom data data in the long description. description.



Updated the Component tree view icon in the description format dialog boxes.



LEN_CMP_TBL uses the calculated length of the bolt in the description formats.

Items added and updated wi th CADWorx Spec Editor 2014: 2014: Software Enhancements 





















You can now import legacy legacy pipe supports from from an assembly file or a data file for use in CADWorx. For more information, see Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File (on page 61) page 61) and and Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File (on page 62) page 62).. You can now import and export formats in the Long Description Format , Short Descrip Descrip tion Format , Tag Format , and Part Part Number Format dialog boxes. For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139) page 139).. You can now enter the Short Description and Tag in the Properties pane for each component. For more information, see Common Component Properties (on page 180) page 180).. You can now add and view the category PipeSupport . Added the PipeSupport category property descriptions to the Property Descriptions (on page 162) page 162).. For more information, see PipeSupport (on page 206) page 206).. Added the Pipe Support Assembly pane to the project file. You can add new pipe support assemblies and add new pipe sup port components. For more information, see Pipe Support Library (on page 128) page 128),, Add Pipe Support Library (on page 105) page 105),, Add Pipe Support Assembly (on page 129) page 129),, and Add a new support assembly (on page 132) page 132).. Data specifications using the Import You can now import Smart Plant Referenc e Data Specification From SPRD SPRD File option. For more information, see Import Specification From SPRD File (on page 103) page 103)..

You can now add a DBCode table in Catalog or import from a file. DBCodes can be specified when starting a new project, adding a new specification, and adding the DBCode Table to an existing project. You can change the DBCode table properties in all locations dealing with DBCodes. For more information, see DBCode Table (on page 52) page 52),, Import DBCode Table From File (on page 53) page 53),, Add DBCode Table (on page 53) page 53),, DBCode Tables folder (on (on page 71) page 71),, New Project (on page 18) page 18),, Add Specification (on page 77) page 77),, Add a new specification (on page 79) page 79),, Edit Project Specs features (on page 94) page 94),, Project Properties (on page 162) page 162),, Specification Properties (on page 163) page 163),, and DBCode Tables Properties (on page 236). 236). All of these topics have been updated or added to the manual. IndexCode t able for a Catalog. For more information, see You can now create an IndexCode IndexCode Table (on page 51) page 51)..

You can now double-click to add formats to the format setup setup dialog boxes. Part Part Number and Edit Compon ent pane. For more information, see Format has been added to the New and Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) page 86) and and Description Format Dialog Boxes (on page 139) page 139).. You can now define layers using the Layer Manager . For more information, see Layer Manager Dialog Box (on page 142) page 142).. Table . For You can now set the end types to match up by using the Matching End Type Table more information, see Matching End Type Table Dialog Box (on page 143). 143).


241

Update History 









You can now add custom custom data throughout the Specification Specification Editor to projects, specifications, Ad d Cu st om Data tables, and more using either the Custom Data option or the right-click Add To All Tables Tables option. For more information, see Edit data table features (on page 50) page 50) or or any topic with the property Custom Data. All properties are listed in Property Descriptions (on page 162) page 162).. You can now copy components components in the components components list in a project. For more information, see Copy (on page 24) page 24).. Spec, the DBCode Table and the When you import the DAT file using Import B y Spec, IndexCode Table attached to the file display in the Catalog Data. For more information, see Import By Spec (on page 57) page 57)..

You can now view and change component types using the the Component Types view. For more information, see Display Panel (on page 70) page 70) and and Component Types (on page 75) page 75).. You can now select Mitered Elbow in Type when creating a data table for Elbows . For more information, see Elbows (on page 187) page 187)..

Users Guide 

Added all new properties with descriptions to the Property Descriptions (on page 162) page 162)..

Items added and up dated wit h CADWorx Spec Editor 2013 2013 R2: R2: Software Enhancements 









You can now import AutoCAD Plant 3D catalogs using the Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data option. For more information, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data (on page 29) page 29).. You can now import AutoCAD Plant 3D specifications specifications to a project using the the Import Au to CAD Pl ant 3D Spec if ic ati on Data option. For more information, see Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data (on page 98) page 98).. You can now review catalog data when when updating a project from a catalog with with the Review Update option. You can also use the Review Review Table Link s option on the Catalog panel to review and update. For more information, see Catalog Panel (on page 108) page 108),, Update From Catalog (on page 108) page 108),, Review Update (on page 109) page 109),, Review Table Links (on page 109) page 109),, Review Table Links Dialog Box and (on page 109) page 109).. You can now review the catalog data between between a catalog and its base catalog by selecting Table Lin ks option in the ri ght-click menu. For more information, see Edit table the Review Table features (on page 26) page 26) and and Review Table Links Dialog Box (on page 109) page 109).. You can now setup the short description and tag formats formats for projects. For For more information, see New Project (on page 18) page 18),, Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes (on page 86) page 86),, Add single new component to a spec (on page 89) page 89),, New and Edit Component Pane (on page 80) page 80),, Add Multi Component Pane (on page 91) page 91),, Add multiple new components to a spec (on page 93) page 93),, Project Properties (on page 162) page 162),, and Specification Properties (on page 163) page 163).. All of these topics have been updated or added to the manual.


242

Update History Items added and up dated wit h CADWorx Spec Editor 2013 2013 R1: R1: Software Enhancements 







Data You can now import AutoPLANT specification and data using the Import AutoPLANT Data option. For more information, see Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data (on page 28) page 28).. Excel . For You can now export data data to an Excel Excel or text document document with with the Export t o Text Excel more information, see Export Data Panel (on page 69) page 69) and and Export Table To Text Excel (on page 69) page 69)..

You now can find and and replace replace text in a project with the Find and Replace option. For more information, see Editing Panel (on page 124) page 124) and and Find and Replace (on page 125) page 125).. You can now right-click in the Main List View and import legacy catalogs from a spec or data Data. For more information, see Edit file, export to text or Excel, or Import AutoPLANT Data table features (on page 26) page 26)..


243

Glossary abstract part

A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that that cannot be materially provided by the the organization that defines the specification. actuator

A device used to operate operate a valve using electric, pneumatic, or hydraulic pressure. AISC (A mer i can Ins ti tu te of Steel Con st ru ct io n)

An organization responsible for defining defining American steel construction construction standards. AISI

American Iron and Steel Steel Institute anchor bolts

Bolts used to connect structural members to concrete footings. angle

The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch. arc element

A structural member of constant radius used to model curved elements. arrangement arrangement (accommod ation)

Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and piping. arrangement (HVAC)

Components and ductwork of a ventilation system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional representation. arrangement (outfitting)

Outfitting structure arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional representation. assembly

Unit composed of a collection of parts or other assemblies. Assembly creation consumes the individual part names and provides the unit a unique identification in the fabrication process. attribute

A single type of non-graphics non-graphics information that is stored stored about an object such as diameter or end preparation.


244

Glossary axis

An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms of an x-, y-, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic o bjects have an associated axis used to define the center or axis for rotations. bar

A steel rod used to reinforce concrete. basic design

Engineering definition of the model and its systems. bay

The distance between two trusses. BCSA (British Constructional Steelwork Association)

An organization responsible for defining British steel construction standards. beam

A structural member type typically placed with the member axis in a nominal horizontal orientation. bearing plate

A steel plate used to distribute a load over a larger area. Usually used at the base of a column. bent

A vertical framework usually consisting of a truss or beam supported at the ends on columns. bill of m aterial (BOM)

Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of an engineering department; an MBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of manufacturing). brace

A diagonal member used to stiffen a framework. cans

A reinforcing connection piece placed at member intersections. cantilever

A beam, girder, or truss that overhangs one or both supports. catalog

Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. W hen you use catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project. This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.


245

Glossary change history

Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for an y given modification. change management

Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. For example, software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need updating as a result of a change in a 3-D model. change propagation

Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a higher order object. channel

A structural shape referring to a three-sided member type with each of the sides joined at a right angle. chord

The principal member of a truss. Can be on either the top or bottom of the truss. circular tube

A structural shape referring to a hollow cylindrical member type or pipe. CISC (Canadian Inst itute of Steel Cons truct ion)

An organization responsible for defining Canadian steel construction standards. class

Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics. clip angle

A small angle-shaped piece of steel used for fastening members together. codelist

A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification a llows you to select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel. column

A vertical structural member usually attached to a footing and extending to the roof of a building. commodity code

A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog. commodity item

A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component). component

Physical part that a feature generates.


246

Glossary concurrent access

Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of a model. coordinate

The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis. coordinate system

A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located b y traversing the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the model. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as 0,0,0. cope

To cut out the top or bottom flanges an d possibly the web so that one member frames into another. cross section

The shape of a member when viewed along the member line. cutback

An axial offset that typically represents the distance from a member centerline to its face. Cutbacks are used to account for the difference between how a structure is modeled and constructed in terms of lengths of members and quantities of m aterials. cutting plane

A plane that cuts through an object. damage records

Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after construction of a plant. data interchange

Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or movement to another computer software system. database

Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate. database backup

Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes after the date that the last complete copy was created. database break and r ecovery

Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.


247

Glossary database copy

Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another design project. database management

Functionality related to managing a product model database. degree

The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree 1 curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve. degree of freedom

An allowable direction of movement, either translation or rotation. There are six possible degrees of freedom (DOFs): translation X, Y, and Z, and rotation RX, RY, and RZ. design alternative

Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so you can uniquel y refer to the design alternatives. design approval log

Record of review and approval of parts of the des ign. design documents

Drawings, sketches, material lists, procedures, and so forth that are generated during the design phase. design object

Any object with properties that you can select. A design object can be related to one or more contracts of different types, but related only to one contract of a given type. design progress check

Analysis of the content of the design to some metric unit that gives an idea of the degree of completion. design review

Functionality to support rapid viewing of the des ign and markup of features with comments. design service

Any general system services related to the design function. design standard

Feature or object used in pl ant design that has been determined to the normal or approved way of accomplishing a design requirement. In the context of computer software, the term refers to computer functionality to support standards, not the standard itself.


248

Glossary detail schedule

Lowest level of schedule used to manage and track work progress. diagonals

A member used for stiffening and wind bracing. distributed systems

Systems consisting of sequential parts with a distributive characteristic (for example, pipes distribute fluids, HVAC distributes air, cabling distributes power, and structure distributes loads). distribution systems

Term synonymous and used interchangeably with the term distributed systems. documentation

Drawings and other records that you must produce to document, obtain approval, or build the design. drawing tool

Tool that helps in the process of creating, modifying, or manipulating objects. Examples are PinPoint and SmartSketch. driftpin

A tapered steel pin used to align bolt or rivet holes when assembling steel. easting

A term that describes an east coordinate location in a coordinate system. edge

A topological object that represents a trimmed curve bounded by a start and end vertex. edge distance

The distance from the center of a bo lt or rivet to the edge of a plate or flange. equipment

Pieces that a foundation supports. Examples are engines, generators, pumps, fans, consoles, large valves, large strainers, and winches. Usually, you can find these pieces on a machinery arrangement plan. Equipment is most often associated with a s ystem. equipment catalog

Catalog of equipment geometry and limited properties that the software uses to i dentify and visualize equipment and its placement i n the model. The catalog is not the source for the total specification and ordering data for the object. erection clearance

The amount of space left between members to ease a ssembly.


249

Glossary fabricate

To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the sho p. face

A topological object that represents a trimmed surface bounded by a loop of edges. face plate

An edge reinforcement type that places a plate or profile at the selected plate edge. face-to-face

The overall length of a component from the inlet face to the outlet face. fasteners

Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members. element

Primitive geometric shape such as a line, c ircle, or arc. feature

A logical collection of parts driven by the piping specification. There are four basic features: straight, turn, branch, and inline component. fence

Boundary or barrier that separates or closes off an area. T o surround or close like a fence. field adjustment

Material added to the neat design geometry of piping or structural parts to allow for fit up in the case that extra material is required due to u ncontrolled variance in the manufacturing and construction process. flange

The projecting portion of a beam, channel, or column. flavor

A different variation of a symbol. Each variation has different occurrence property values. flexure

A term used for describing bending behavior. focus of rotation

A point or line about which an object or view turns. footing

An enlargement at the base of a column, or at the bottom of a wall, that distributes the load over a greater portion of ground and thereby prevents settling.


250

Glossary frame connection

A way of establishing connectivity between member parts to represent physical relationships such as work point offsets, and logical relationships such as end releases. A placement positioning mechanism to represent physical relationships between member s ystems that establishes and maintains connectivity. framing plan

A structural drawing plan view, drawn to scale, providing an overhead view of the structural components of a building. Columns, beams, and girders, roof members, floor members, and wall members all require separate framing plans. full penetration weld

A type of weld in which the weld material extends through the complete thickness of the components being joined. function points

Part of the requirements documentation, function points are the smallest granularity of a requirement statement that describe specific detailed actions that the software performs. functional block diagram

Schematic representation of a system (piping, electrical, ventilation) showing system parts and their relationship. You use symbols to represent equipm ent and components. A connecting network of lines illustrates their relationship. Taken together, the symbols and the network illustrate the function of the system. furnishings

Parts such as movable articles and fittings that normally are not associated with a system (for example, a chair). generic specific

Object that is parametrically defined or defined to suit a family of specific parts (for example, International Standards parametrics). For example, a 100 - 200 gpm pump in the catalog can provide a general shape to appear in the model until a specific object has been identified. See also specific and specific object. girder

A horizontal support member similar to a beam. Some people maintain that girders span from column to column, and beams span from girder to girder. Other people maintain that beams span column to column and girders span from beam to beam. girt

A beam, usually bolted to columns, to support the side covering or to serve as a window lintel. grade

The material grade of the structural member.


251

Glossary GUIDs

Acronym that stands for Globally Unique Identifiers. The software automatically creates the GUIDs sheet in the Excel workbooks when you create the Catalog database and schema. The purpose of storing GUIDs within Excel workbooks is to help you keep track of what has been loaded into the database. Storing GUIDs also helps to avoid the situation in which a replacement Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid. gusset plate

A plate used to connect various members, such as in a truss. hook element

An analytical element or boundary condition used to simulate one-way tension-only behavior. A hook element is a backwards gap with the ability to resist tension o nly when the hook is cl osed. It resists neither tension nor compression when it is open. Typical uses of hook elements in modeling include structural bracing, cables, tension, bolts, and the separation of two connected regions. HVAC

Acronym for heating, ventilation and cooling. This system is the distribution system design for heating or cooling. HVAC analysis

Analysis routines that address heating and cooling loads required for the compartments and that size or evaluate ventilation ducts and blower requirements. initial design

Early stage of design work, generally before contract, used to estimate construction costs and provide a rough concept of the intended plant. Contains information relating to a plant c reated during its initial (concept) design period. initial structural plan

Principal structural plan for the plant; also ca lled a construction profile. inline

A term used to refer to those piping components that can be inserted in a pipe feature. instantiation

Occurrence of a catalog object at a s pecific geometric location in the model. interference checking

A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between objects in the model. I-Section

A structural shape referring to any member type in the form of an I. jo b o rd er

Industrial authorization for accomplishing work; synonymous with a work order.


252

Glossary jo is t

A horizontal structural members that support the floor or roof of a building. kinematics analysis

Analysis of mechanical motion. knee brace

A corner brace used to prevent angular movement. leg length analysis

Preferred term is welding length analysis. library

Resource of reference information that you can access in developing a plant design. life cy cle database

Information developed to assist in the maintenance and modernization of delivered plants. link

Way to store information about another file in your document. You can update a link so that changes in the file appear in your document. lintel

A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening. load (structure)

A force vector applied to a member. logical member

An object in the model used to represent the design topology. machinery

Major pieces of equipment installed in a plant. macro

A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro, the software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the other OLE-aware programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications, Visual C++, and so forth. maintenance envelope

A rectangular box around the part for clearance during maintenance operations. maintenance parts

Required material for depot or on-board repair or overhaul of equipment, as determined by engineering study. Generally at a level below the purchased construction object of the pla nt.


253

Glossary maintenance records

Records of breakdown, repair, and overhaul of equipment. material analysis

Analysis of a completed design work for extracting detailed material requirements; also called material lists. material list

An option category that controls the format and content of the bill of materials. material properties

Properties of the material useful in the anal ysis process. member name

A user-definable alphanumeric code used to uniquely identify individual members in the model. member part

A model object derived from the logical model that represents the manufactured physical member parts. member system

A logical collection of member parts that can be moved as a single entity. move from point

Starting point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move From point determines the point of origin for the move. move to point

Ending point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move T o point determines where you want the move to stop. natural surface

A surface without a boundary curve. node 





One of the set of discrete points in a flow graph. A terminal of any branch of a network or a terminal common to two or more branches of a network. An end point of any branch or a network or graph, or a junction common to two or more branches.

northing

A term that describes a north coordinate location in a coordinate system. nozzle

A piping connection point to a piece of equipment.


254

Glossary nozzle standout

The shortest allowable distance between the connection poin t of a nozzle and the start point of a turn on the leg connected to the nozzle. NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter)

The diameter of a pipe. object

A type of data other than the native graphic format of the application. orientation vector

A vector used to define the local y-x plane of a physical member when combined with the local x-axis defined by the start and end n odes. origin

In coordinate geometry, the point where the X-, Y-, and Z-axes intersect. origin point

The point at which the coordinate s ystem is placed, providing a full Cartesian coordinate system with positive and negative quadrants. Points are placed at coordinates relative to the origin point, represented by the X, Y, and Z values. orthogonal

The characteristic of an element consisting completely of elements positioned at 90-degree angles. A square is an orthogonal el ement. orthographic

A depiction of an object created by projecting its features onto a plane along lines perpendicular to the plane. orthotropic material

A material that has two material directions that are orthogonal to one another. An example of an orthotropic material is wood. P&ID

Diagram that shows the topology, functional components, and special requirements of a piping system; generally represents the engineering design of the system. package

Set of closely related classes. (UML) panel

The space between adjacent floor supports, or purlins, in a roof. parameter

A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something.


255

Glossary part class

A group of similar objects. You can define part classes in the Excel workbooks. A part class can have multiple parts. For example, a heat exchanger part class can contain heat e xchangers with different dimensions. part number

Unique identifier of a part. parts

The physical components that comprise a feature and are generally selected by the software. For example, the flanges, gaskets, and the gate val ve itself are examples of the parts comprising the gate valve feature. PDS (Plant Design System)

A comprehensive, intelligent, computer-aided design and engineering application for the process, power, and marine industries. PDS consists of integrated 2-D and 3-D modules that correspond to engineering tasks in the desi gn workflow. physical member

A concept that helps to eliminate modeling errors by providing a straightforward method for defining structure geometry by placing members in a model in much the same way that they would be framed in the field. During a nalysis pre-processing, physical members are split into finite elements (segments) while still maintaining the coll ective status of the physical member during model revisions. The software assigns member releases at each end of the true physical member, while preventing release assignments from being made to interior n odes of the finite elements. pitch

The ratio of rise to run for roofs. Pitch is also the center distance between bolts or rivets, parallel to the axis of the member. plate

A flat, rectangular steel shape. port

A connection point to a pipe or a component such as a valve. post tensioning

A method of pre-stressing concrete, by stressing the steel strands after the concrete has been poured and allowed to harden. precast concrete

Concrete members that are poured in forms at a plant or factory and allowed to harden. Two types of precast products exist: pre-stressed products and reinforced products. pre-stressed concrete

Concrete products that are stressed by passing high-strength steel strands through the form and applying stress to the strands either before or after the concrete is poured.


256

Glossary pretensioning

Stressing the steel strands in a pre-stressed member before the concrete is poured into the form. primary member

A main structural support member. principle of superposition

The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and displacements due to different forces can be combined. This principle is only valid for linear analysis. product structure

Hierarchical breakdown or decomposition of a product into constituent parts, volum es, or units. (For example, a bill of m aterial is one possible t ype of product structure.) production planning

Functionality associated with the work breakdown and sequence of the construction of a plant. purlin

Horizontal structural member extending between trusses, used as beams for supporting the roof. rafters

Beams or truss members that support the purlins. rebar

A term for steel reinforcing bars that are used to reinforce concrete. rectangular bar

A structural shape referring to a four-sided solid bar. rectangular tube

A structural shape referring to a four-sided hollow member type. reference data

The data that is necessary to design plants or ships using the software. Reference data includes graphical information, such as symbols. It also contains tabular information, such as physical dimensions and piping specifications. reflect

A parameter that affects the placement orientation of member cross sections. At your option, the sections can be placed with their geometry reflected or mirrored about the local section y-axis. reinforced concrete plan

A framing plan that identifies all beams and slabs by letter and number. The slab, beam, and bend schedules give all details for preparation and placement (number, size, spacing, bending, and location) of the reinforcing steel.


257

Glossary resource estimation

Rough estimate of material, manpower, and facility utilization for the d esign and construction of the plant. retaining wall

A structural wall, either gravity or cantilever, used to hold back dirt or other materials. route

1) A line connecting a s eries of points in space and constituting a proposed or traveled route. 2) The set of links and junctions joined in series to establish a connection. rule-based joint

A feature that enables you to offset the work point of two members that intersect at a node. The rules vary depending on the structural type, member orientation, and construction practices. Ruled joints are typically used when a connection detail calls for the physical member ends to be noncoincident with the centerline of an intersection member. sag ties

Tie rods between purlins in the plane of a roof, used to carry the component of the roof load parallel to the roof. Tie rods are used to support girts. SAISC (South A frican Insti tute of Steel Constructi on)

An organization responsible for defining South African steel construction standards. schema

A database that creates the structure of another database. For example, a schema specifies the queries, tables, fields, and data types in a database. secondary member

A member that is not a significant load-bearing member. section

A structural member whose parameters are defined in a table. section name

An alphanumeric code used to refer to a particular member in a table; for example W18X35. section ori entation

The position of physical member cress section relative to the physical member local coordinate system. section table

A library of standard structural shapes containing the necessary parametric properties of each section size, such as depth, width, and inertias.


258

Glossary shear stiffness

A physical member property that indicates whether to include shear stiffness in the analytical element stiffness matrix of a member. shear walls

A wall designed to resist lateral loading from winds, underground disturbances, or blasts. shell structure

External portion of the surface of the plant. site

The top level in the Project Management hierarchy. A Site configuration may contain several Catalogs, each shared by multiple Plants. skewed member

A structural member that is not at right angles to its connecting members. slab

A flat concrete area usually reinforced with wire mesh and rebar. sleeve

A part that connects two pipes or two ducts, for example. A sleeve can be used to prevent water from leaking through a hole. span

A group of contiguous physical members that are not intersected by a brace- or column-type physical member. specifications

Contracted requirements for the plant. splice (structure)

To fasten together two physical members, usually columns end-to-end, to form a single continuing length. steel reinfor ced concrete

An association of concrete and steel where the concrete is there to stand the compression forces and the steel the traction forces. The resulting s tructure can withstand traction and flexion. stiffener

An angle, plate, or channel fastened to a member to prevent buckling. stress

Forces acting on structural members due to various types of loads. These forces can be shear, tension, compression, or torsion.


259

Glossary stringer

A longitudinal member used to support loads directly. structure analysis

Analysis routines that provide stress and deflection data for structural designs. Loading conditions can be both static and dynamic. Finite element analysis is the most common type of structure analysis. strut

A compression member in a framework. stud

A bolt, threaded on both ends, used to connect components. suspended floor

A concrete floor system built above and off the ground. system

A conceptual design grouping that organizes parts in hierarchical relationships. A system represents a functional view of the model and includes information such as system name, type, properties, and design specifications for the objects assigned to the system. tag number

User-specific, unique number assigned to an object (for example, CV-101 for a control valve, HE-2002 for a heat exchanger). target point

The origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target point anywhere on the drawing sheet or view. tilt-up walls

Concrete walls that are poured in forms on the ground and then tilted up into place by cranes or hoists. transition

A cross-sectional type that results in a tapered length of member and involves a gradual change in section size. See also uniform. truss

A rigid framed structure consisting of straight members joined to form a pattern of interconnecting triangles for carrying loads. uniform

A cross-section type that results in a uniform length of member and involves an abrupt change in section size. See also transition.


260

Glossary unit/module modeler

Facility of the system to structure collections of equip ment and components into a single identifiable object. user attributes

A customized property in the reference data. The Custom Interfaces sheets in the Excel workbooks define these properties. You can list the customized properties on the individual part class sheets. vertex

A topological object that represents a point in the three-dimensional model. web

The center section separating the flanges of an I-section, tee, or channel. weight and CG analysis

Routines that compute the weight of commodity materials as configured in a given design (for example, plate and pipe) and determine total weight and center of gravity (CG) for a collection of material and equipment, as well as the c omplete plant. welding

Weld requirements for joining materials. Welding length an alysis is the calculation of required weld dimensions; also called leg length analysis. wizard

Software routine attached to an application that provides guidance and expert help to you to complete one of the functionalities of the application. work order

Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order. working plane

The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection. workspace

Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and includes the user modeling settings. Workspace Explor er

Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace. X-section

Cross section; a graphically placed cross section representing the member section size. yield strength

The stress beyond which a material sustains permanent deformation.


261

Index A About • 22 abstract part • 244 actuator • 244 Add a new bolt diameter table • 33 Add a new bolt length table • 36 Add a new data table • 47 Add a new end prep table • 55 Add a new endtype table • 45 Add a new material table • 39 Add a new schedule table • 41 Add a new size table • 31 Add a new specification • 79 Add a new support assembly • 132 Add a new thickness table • 43 Add DBCode Table • 53 Add Group Pipe Support Assembly • 129 Add Index Code Table • 51 Add MAINSIZE • 45 Add Multi Component Pane • 91 Add multiple new components to a spec • 93 Add New Diameter • 34 Add New Length • 37 Add New MAINSIZE • 45 Add New Size • 32 Add new topworks table • 49 Add new user shape • 48 Add Pipe Support Assembly • 129 Add Pipe Support Library • 105 Add Schedule • 41 Add single new component to a spec • 89 Add Specification • 77 Add Standard Diameter • 34 Add Standard EndPrep • 56 Add Standard Length • 37 Add Standard Size • 32 Add Table Panel • 25 AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) • 244 AISI • 244 anchor bolts • 244 angle • 244 arc element • 244 arrangement (accommodation) • 244 arrangement (HVAC) • 244 arrangement (outfitting) • 244 assembly • 244


attribute • 244 axis • 245

B bar • 245 Base Catalog Data • 72 basic design • 245 bay • 245 BCSA (British Constructional Steelwork Association) • 245 beam • 245 bearing plate • 245 bent • 245 bill of material (BOM) • 245 Bolt Diameter Table • 32 Bolt Diameter Table Properties • 171 Bolt Length Table • 35 Bolt Length Table Properties • 172 brace • 245

C cans • 245 cantilever • 245 Caps • 182 catalog • 245 Catalog Data • 65, 70 Catalog Panel • 108 Catalog Properties • 170 Category Table • 46 Cell Name Reference - Component Properties • 116 Cell Name Reference - Specification Properties • 113 change history • 246 change management • 246 change propagation • 246 channel • 246 chord • 246 circular tube • 246 CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) • 246 class • 246 clip angle • 246 Clipboard Panel • 23 codelist • 246 column • 246 commodity code • 246

262

Index commodity item • 246 Common Component Properties • 180 component • 246 Component Tables • 75 Component Types • 75 concurrent access • 247 coordinate • 247 coordinate system • 247 cope • 247 Copy • 24 Couplings • 183 Create a new properties field • 74 cross section • 247 Crosses • 185 Cut • 25 cutback • 247 cutting plane • 247

D damage records • 247 data interchange • 247 Data Table • 46 Data Tables folder • 71 Data Tables Properties • 179 database • 247 database backup • 247 database break and recovery • 247 database copy • 248 database management • 248 DBCode Table • 52 DBCode Tables folder • 71 DBCode Tables Properties • 236 degree • 248 degree of freedom • 248 Description Format Dialog Boxes • 139 design alternative • 248 design approval log • 248 design documents • 248 design object • 248 design progress check • 248 design review • 248 design service • 248 design standard • 248 detail schedule • 249 diagonals • 249 Display Panel • 70, 127, 156 Display the bolt diameter part number in CADWorx Plant • 35 Display the bolt length part number in CADWorx Plant • 37 Display the material assigned to the component in CADWorx Plant • 153


distributed systems • 249 distribution systems • 249 documentation • 249 drawing tool • 249 driftpin • 249

E easting • 249 edge • 249 edge distance • 249 Edit a field • 75 Edit a support assembly • 132 Edit a support component • 138 Edit bolt diameter table • 34 Edit bolt length table • 37 Edit data table features • 50 Edit end prep table • 56 Edit endtype table • 45 Edit material table • 40 Edit Pipe Support Component Pane • 133 Edit Project Specs features • 94 Edit schedule table • 41 Edit size table • 32 Edit Table Features • 26 Edit thickness table • 43 Editing Panel • 124 Elbows • 187 End Prep Table • 54 End Prep Tables Properties • 237 End Type Table • 43 EndType Tables • 75 EndType Tables folder • 71 EndType Tables Properties • 176 equipment • 249 equipment catalog • 249 erection clearance • 249 Exit Spec Editor • 22 Export a material assignment setup • 153 Export a single specification to Excel • 122 Export Data Panel • 69 Export multiple specifications or an entire project to Excel • 122 Export Table To Text Excel • 69 Export to Excel • 112 Export to Text • 122 Export/Import Data Panel • 112

F fabricate • 250 face • 250 face plate • 250

263

Index face-to-face • 250 fasteners • 250 feature • 250 fence • 250 field adjustment • 250 File • 16 Find and Replace • 125 flange • 250 Flanges • 190 flavor • 250 flexure • 250 focus of rotation • 250 footing • 250 frame connection • 251 framing plan • 251 full penetration weld • 251 function points • 251 functional block diagram • 251 furnishings • 251

G Gaskets/Bolts/Welds • 194 generic specific • 251 girder • 251 girt • 251 grade • 251 GUIDs • 252 gusset plate • 252

H Help • 15 Home Catalog Tab • 23 Home Project Tab • 77 hook element • 252 HVAC • 252 HVAC analysis • 252

I Import a material assignment setup • 153 Import a single specification using a CADWorx catalog • 101 Import a single specification using an AutoCAD Plant 3D catalog • 100 Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Catalog Data • 29 Import AutoCAD Plant 3D Specification Data • 98 Import AutoPLANT Catalog Data • 28 Import AutoPLANT Specification Data • 95 Import By Spec • 57 Import data from Excel to a specification • 124


Import DBCode Table From File • 53 Import From Data File • 58 Import Legacy Pipe Support Library • 107 Import Legacy Specification • 111 Import multiple specifications using a CADWorx catalog • 102 Import Pipe Support Legacy From Assembly File • 61 Import Pipe Support Legacy From Data File • 62 Import Specification From SPRD File • 103 Import Update From Excel • 123 IndexCode Table • 51 IndexCode Tables folder • 71 IndexCode Tables Properties • 236 initial design • 252 initial structural plan • 252 inline • 252 Insert Multiple Rows • 54 Insert Row • 39 instantiation • 252 interference checking • 252 Intergraph CADWorx Catalog and Specification Editor • 7 I-Section • 252

J job order • 252 joist • 253

K Keywords • 11 kinematics analysis • 253 knee brace • 253

L Laterals • 201 Layer Manager Dialog Box • 142 leg length analysis • 253 Legacy Catalog Data Panel • 56 Legacy Specification Panel • 111 library • 253 life cycle database • 253 link • 253 lintel • 253 List Items Dialog Box • 74 load (structure) • 253 logical member • 253 Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes • 86

264

Index

M machinery • 253 macro • 253 maintenance envelope • 253 maintenance parts • 253 maintenance records • 254 Matching End Type Table Dialog Box • 143 material analysis • 254 Material Assignment Setup • 144 material list • 254 material properties • 254 Material Table • 38 Material Tables folder • 71 Material Tables Properties • 173 member name • 254 member part • 254 member system • 254 Miscellaneous folder • 72 move from point • 254 move to point • 254

N natural surface • 254 New and Edit Component Pane • 80 New Catalog • 17 New Field Dialog Box • 72 New Pipe Support Libraries • 20 New Project • 18 node • 254 northing • 254 nozzle • 254 nozzle standout • 255 NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter) • 255

O object • 255 O-Lets • 202 Open • 21 orientation vector • 255 origin • 255 origin point • 255 orthogonal • 255 orthographic • 255 orthotropic material • 255 Other Editing Features • 25

P P&ID • 255 package • 255 panel • 255


parameter • 255 part class • 256 part number • 256 parts • 256 Paste • 23 PDS (Plant Design System) • 256 physical member • 256 Pipe • 204 Pipe Support Assembly and Component Properties • 169 Pipe Support Description Format Dialog Boxes • 157 Pipe Support Libraries Properties • 166 Pipe Support Library • 128 Pipe Support Library File Home Tab • 155 Pipe Support Library File View Tab • 156 Pipe Support Library Properties • 167 Pipe Support Long, Short, Tag, and Part Number Format Dialog Boxes • 159 Pipe Support Panel • 105 PipeSupport • 206 Pitch • 256 PLANT 3D Size Table Detail Dialog Box • 100 plate • 256 port • 256 post tensioning • 256 precast concrete • 256 pre-stressed concrete • 256 pretensioning • 257 primary member • 257 principle of superposition • 257 product structure • 257 production planning • 257 Project Catalog Data • 127 Project Data • 66 Project Properties • 162 Project Specs • 127 Properties • 72, 138, 156 Property Descriptions • 162 purlin • 257

Q Quick Access Toolbar • 14

R rafters • 257 rebar • 257 Recent Files • 22 rectangular bar • 257 rectangular tube • 257

265

Index Reducers • 214 reference data • 257 reflect • 257 reinforced concrete plan • 257 Remove Row • 25 resource estimation • 258 retaining wall • 258 Review Table Links • 109 Review Table Links Dialog Box • 109 Review Update • 109 route • 258 rule-based joint • 258

S sag ties • 258 SAISC (South African Institute of Steel Construction) • 258 Sanitary • 216 Save • 21 Save As • 21 Save As Pipe Support Libraries • 22 Schedule Assignment Setup • 154 Schedule Table • 40 Schedule Tables folder • 71 Schedule Tables Properties • 174 schema • 258 secondary member • 258 section • 258 section name • 258 section orientation • 258 section table • 258 Set material assignment for a specific component • 151 Set material assignment for a specific component with a specific end type • 152 Set material assignment for all components • 149 Set material assignment for all components based on size • 150 shear stiffness • 259 shear walls • 259 shell structure • 259 site • 259 Size Table • 30 Size Tables folder • 70 Size Tables Properties • 171 skewed member • 259 slab • 259 sleeve • 259 span • 259 Spec Blind/Bleed Ring/Exp Joint • 218 Specification Panel • 77


Specification Properties • 163 specifications • 259 splice (structure) • 259 Status Bar • 15 steel reinforced concrete • 259 stiffener • 259 Strainers • 220 stress • 259 stringer • 260 structure analysis • 260 strut • 260 stud • 260 Support Data • 68 suspended floor • 260 system • 260

T tag number • 260 target point • 260 Tees • 222 Thickness Table • 42 Thickness Tables folder • 71 Thickness Tables Properties • 175 tilt-up walls • 260 Topworks • 224 Transfer Data Panel • 65 transition • 260 truss • 260

U Undo • 25 uniform • 260 Unions • 226 unit/module modeler • 261 Update From Catalog • 108 Update History • 239 Upgrade Previous Version Project and Catalog Files • 17 user attributes • 261 User Shapes • 228

V Valves • 230 vertex • 261 View Catalog Tab • 70 View Project Tab • 127

W web • 261 weight and CG analysis • 261

266

Cad Wor x Spec Editor Users Guide

Recommend Documents